WO2020179321A1 - Control system and control method - Google Patents

Control system and control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020179321A1
WO2020179321A1 PCT/JP2020/004159 JP2020004159W WO2020179321A1 WO 2020179321 A1 WO2020179321 A1 WO 2020179321A1 JP 2020004159 W JP2020004159 W JP 2020004159W WO 2020179321 A1 WO2020179321 A1 WO 2020179321A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
state
moving body
area
unit
control system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/004159
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
井川 喜博
博 白水
Original Assignee
パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 filed Critical パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority to JP2021503472A priority Critical patent/JP7407401B2/en
Publication of WO2020179321A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020179321A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05DSYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLING OR REGULATING NON-ELECTRIC VARIABLES
    • G05D1/00Control of position, course, altitude or attitude of land, water, air or space vehicles, e.g. using automatic pilots
    • G05D1/02Control of position or course in two dimensions

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a control system and a control method. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to a control system and a control method for controlling a moving body that moves within a predetermined area.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a mobile robot control system (control system) including a plurality of automatic transporters (mobile bodies) and a server device that wirelessly communicates with the automatic transporters.
  • the server device includes a storage unit that stores map information, route information of an automatic carrier, and carrier information, a route search unit that searches a moving route of the automatic carrier based on the map information, and route information. Based on this, it has a movement control unit that gives a movement instruction to the automatic carrier.
  • the route search unit automatically detects the interference. Modify the route information for at least one of the carriers to avoid interference.
  • the number of automatic carriers increases, the number of situations in which it is determined that the movements of the plurality of automatic carriers may interfere with each other increases, which may hinder the smooth passage of the automatic carriers. there were.
  • An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control system and a control method capable of realizing smooth passage of a moving body.
  • the control system controls the passage of a moving body using a passage control module.
  • the traffic control module includes an area set in a part of a predetermined area in which the moving body moves and a status output unit.
  • the status output unit is provided corresponding to the area.
  • the state output unit is a state indicating whether it is a permitted state that allows the passage of the moving body or a disallowed state that disallows the passage of the moving body in at least one of the first direction and the second direction.
  • the first direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area
  • the second direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area.
  • a control method includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process.
  • the first setting process an area is set in a part of a predetermined area where the moving body moves.
  • the second setting process the passage of the moving body is permitted or the passage of the moving body is not permitted in at least one of the first direction and the second direction corresponding to the area.
  • a state output unit is provided for outputting state information indicating whether the state is a non-permitted state.
  • the first direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area
  • the second direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area.
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit is controlled to the permitted state or the non-permitted state.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view showing a part of a predetermined area in which a moving body that is a control target of the control system according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure moves.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the same control system.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where a traffic control module included in the control system of the above is provided in a predetermined area.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the same control system.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the moving body controlled by the control system of the same.
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 1 of the traffic control by the control system of the above.
  • FIG. 7 is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 2 of traffic control by the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 8 is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 3 of the traffic control by the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 4 of traffic control by the same control system.
  • FIG. 10 is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 5 of traffic control by the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 11 is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 6 of traffic control by the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 7 of traffic control by the same control system.
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 8 of traffic control by the same control system.
  • FIG. 14 is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 9 of the traffic control by the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic plan view of a predetermined area in which a moving body, which is a control target of the control system, moves.
  • 17A, 17B, and 17C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of cooperative control by the control system of the above.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cooperative control by the control system of the above.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of priority control by the control system of the above.
  • FIG. 20 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the specific area in the control system same as the above.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the control system of the same.
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system according to the third embodiment.
  • the control system 50 is a system for controlling the moving body 10 that moves within a predetermined area A1 (see FIG. 1). Although only one mobile body 10 is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the control system 50 controls the passage of a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the control system 50 configures the mobile body system 1 together with a plurality of mobile bodies 10 that are controlled by the control system 50.
  • the mobile body system 1 according to the present embodiment includes the control system 50 and a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the control system 50 uses the traffic control module M1 including a zone Z1 (see FIG. 1) provided in a part of the predetermined area A1 and a state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1 to move the moving body 10 Control the passage of traffic. Whether the state output unit G1 is in a permission state in which the passage of the moving body 10 is permitted in at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2, or is in a non-permission state in which the passage of the moving body 10 is not permitted.
  • the status information indicating is output.
  • the first direction D1 (hereinafter, also referred to as “incoming direction”) is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the outside to the inside of the zone Z1.
  • the second direction D2 (hereinafter, also referred to as “outgoing direction”) is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the inside of the zone Z1 to the outside.
  • the term “moving body” as used in the present disclosure includes a carrier device for carrying an object (eg, luggage), an unmanned guided vehicle (AGV: Automated Guided Vehicle), a mobile robot, an autonomous navigation ship, a drone, and the like.
  • the “mobile robot” in the present disclosure is, for example, a wheel-type, crawler-type, or leg-type (including walking type) robot.
  • the moving body 10 not only moves within the predetermined area A1 but also has a function of performing various works such as transportation, picking, welding, mounting, display, customer service, security, assembly and inspection. Good.
  • the "predetermined area" A1 is a range in which a plurality of moving bodies 10 move, and as an example, a factory, a warehouse, a construction site, a store, a distribution center, an office, a park, a house, a school, a hospital, a station, an airport. Or a parking lot or the like. Furthermore, for example, when the moving body 10 is installed inside a vehicle such as inside a ship, train or airplane, the inside of the vehicle becomes the predetermined area A1.
  • the "area” Z1 is set in the predetermined area A1 where the moving body 10 moves.
  • the zone Z1 only needs to have a size that can accommodate at least a part of the mobile body 10, and may have a size that can accommodate a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the area Z1 shown in FIG. 1 is a square area, the shape of the area Z1 is not limited to the square, and the size and shape of the area Z1 can be changed as appropriate.
  • one section Z1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 in FIG. 1, a plurality of sections Z1 may be provided in the predetermined area A1.
  • the status output part G1 is provided corresponding to the zone Z1.
  • the state output unit G1 may be provided at the boundary of the area Z1, or may be provided at a portion outside the area Z1 through which the moving body 10 entering and exiting the area Z1 passes.
  • the state output unit G1 of the present embodiment virtually locates the position corresponding to the zone Z1 (for example, the position indicated by the two-dimensional orthogonal coordinates based on the reference position on the map). It is provided in.
  • the state output unit G1 is a virtual configuration provided for outputting state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not, at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
  • the "output" of the state information means that the state output unit G1 triggers the output process to output the state information from the control system 50 to the moving body 10, that is, the state output unit G1 is the moving body from the control system 50. It may include a mode of indirectly outputting the state information to 10.
  • the control system 50 outputs the state information to the moving body 10 by triggering the output processing when the moving body 10 approaches the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the area Z1. ..
  • the moving body 10 acquires the state information output from the control system 50 triggered by the approach to the state output unit G1.
  • the state output unit G1 is virtually provided in the map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, and the control system 50 holds the state information of the state output unit G1. Acquires from the control system 50 the state information of the state output unit G1 held by the control system 50.
  • the state output unit G1 is not limited to a virtual configuration (that is, a configuration without an entity), and may be a configuration with an entity such as a traffic light installed around an area Z1 provided in a predetermined area A1 in a real space. .. If the state output unit G1 is a configuration accompanied by a substance, the state output unit G1 may directly output the state information to the moving body 10 approaching the state output unit G1. The state information is directly acquired from the output unit G1.
  • the output of the state information may include a mode in which the state output unit G1 directly outputs the state information to the moving body 10 and a mode in which the state information is indirectly output.
  • the mobile body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided if the state information indicates a permitted state based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1. Further, if the state information indicates a disallowed state based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1, the moving body 10 is at or in front of the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. Stop. As described above, in the control system 50 of the present embodiment, the passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1.
  • the movement of the moving body 10 can be controlled based on the above. Therefore, it is possible to provide the control system 50 capable of realizing smooth passage of the mobile bodies 10 even when the number of the mobile bodies 10 increases.
  • the moving body 10 is a dedicated work device, that is, a transfer device, which is specialized for the work of transporting the transport object 40 in the predetermined area A1, and is particularly an automatic guided vehicle.
  • the automatic guided vehicle as the moving body 10 performs a work of carrying the object 40 to be carried while moving in the predetermined area A1.
  • the moving body 10 executes a work of transporting parts in a factory, and the transport object 40 is, for example, a pallet (see FIG. 1) on which luggage such as parts is placed. ..
  • the details of the configuration of the moving body 10 exemplified in this embodiment will be described in the section “(1.2.4) Moving body”.
  • the moving body system 1 includes a control system 50 and one or more moving bodies 10.
  • the mobile body system 1 includes a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the traffic control module M1 includes the zone Z1 provided in a part of the predetermined area A1 and the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1, as described above.
  • the traffic control module M1 can be provided in any part of the predetermined area A1. For example, when the user or the like of the moving body 10 designs a moving route along which the moving body 10 moves in the predetermined area A1, one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 are virtually arranged at desired locations on the map of the predetermined area A1. It is provided in.
  • the traffic control module M1 sets an area in which the movement of the moving body 10 is desired to be controlled, such as an area where a plurality of moving routes intersect, an area where a plurality of moving bodies 10 pass alternately, and an area where the moving body 10 is congested. It is preferably provided.
  • FIG. 1 shows a traffic control module M1 provided in the middle of a passage 100 in which a moving body 10 moves in a predetermined area A1.
  • a section Z1 of the traffic control module M1 is provided in a part of the passage 100.
  • the zone Z1 is a rectangular area that is large enough to accommodate one moving body 10. It is not essential that the area Z1 has a size that can accommodate the entire moving body 10, and it is sufficient that the area Z1 has a size that can accommodate at least a part of the moving body 10.
  • the shape of the zone Z1 is not limited to a rectangle, and the shape of the zone Z1 can be changed as appropriate.
  • the width of the passage 100 may be wider than the width that at least one moving body 10 can pass through, and may have a width that allows a plurality of moving bodies 10 to pass each other.
  • the state output unit G1 is provided corresponding to the zone Z1.
  • the state output unit G1 in the passage 100, the state output unit G1 is provided at a position where the moving body 10 moving in and out of the zone Z1 passes.
  • the state output unit G1 outputs the state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in at least one of the first direction D1 (incoming direction) and the second direction D2 (outgoing direction). It is provided corresponding to Z1.
  • the state output unit G1 outputs state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 (for example, the first direction D1). To be done.
  • the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1 does not limit the passage of the moving body 10 in the other of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 (for example, the second direction D2). That is, the state output unit G1 has a function of a traffic light that displays (outputs) information (state information) indicating whether to allow or prohibit the passage of the moving body 10. In other words, the state output unit G1 has a function of a virtual gate appearing at a position corresponding to the area Z1 so as to block the passage of the moving body 10 in the unauthorized state. In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 outputs state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not, only in one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
  • the state output unit G1 is provided so that state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not permitted can be output only in the first direction D1. Therefore, when it is desired to control the passage of the moving body 10 also in the second direction D2, the state output unit for outputting the state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the non-permitted state in the second direction D2 is further provided. It should be provided. That is, the state output unit G1 for outputting the state information indicating whether the state is the permission state or the non-permission state in the first direction D1 corresponding to the zone Z1 and whether the state is the permission state in the second direction D2. It suffices if a state output unit for outputting state information indicating whether the state is the non-permitted state is provided.
  • the control system 50 holds the position where the state output unit G1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 and the state information indicating the state (permitted state or disallowed state) set for the state output unit G1. Has been done. Further, each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in the predetermined area A1 is located at the position where the traffic control module M1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 (that is, the zone Z1 and the state output unit G1 on the map of the predetermined area A1). (Position) information is held. The moving body 10 also has a function of detecting the current position of the moving body 10 within the predetermined area A1.
  • the moving body 10 When the moving body 10 approaches the position where the state output part G1 is provided when moving in the predetermined area A1 toward the zone Z1, the moving body 10 requests the control system 50 to output the state information assigned to the state output part G1. ..
  • the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and moves to the area Z1. To do.
  • the moving body 10 stops at the position where the state output unit G1 is provided or in front of the position.
  • the state output unit G1 crosses the passage 100, for example, in a virtual plane VA1 (see FIG. 3) when the predetermined area A1 is viewed from above, corresponding to the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. It is expressed as the provided vector B1. Therefore, the moving body 10 has the coordinates of the starting point of the vector B1 and the coordinates of the ending point of the vector B1 as information about the state output unit G1.
  • the direction of the vector B1 is a direction corresponding to the direction (first direction D1 or second direction D2) for controlling the passage of the moving body 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, if the direction in which the movement of the moving body 10 is controlled is the first direction D1 (the direction from the right side to the left side in FIG.
  • the vector B1 is the same as the vector B1 and the moving body 10.
  • the direction is such that the outer product (B1 ⁇ C1) with the vector C1 representing the velocity is positive (the direction indicated by the solid arrow in FIG. 3).
  • the case where the direction of the cross product of the vectors is upward is positive.
  • the outer product (B1 ⁇ C1) of the vector B1 and the vector C1 becomes negative, and thus the moving body 10 moving in the first direction D1. Is not controlled by the traffic control module M1.
  • control system 50 controls whether the state information output by the state output unit G1 is allowed or disallowed, and the state indicated by the state information is that of the other mobile body 10. It will be changed as appropriate according to the traffic conditions.
  • the moving body 10 which is the control target of the control system 50 holds the information of the current position of the moving body 10 and the information of the vector C1 representing the speed of the moving body 10.
  • the starting point of the vector C1 is, for example, the reference position of the moving body 10 (for example, the position that is the center of rotation when the moving body 10 rotates), and the direction of the vector C1 is the moving direction of the moving body 10 and the size of the vector C1.
  • the moving body 10 sequentially updates the information of the vector C1 according to the current position and the current moving speed of the moving body 10.
  • the moving body 10 holds the information of one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and the position information regarding the position where the state output unit G1 is provided (that is, the start point and the end point of the vector B1). Information about the coordinates of) is held.
  • the moving body 10 determines whether or not the vector C1 has moved to a position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 based on the position information regarding the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and the information of the vector C1.
  • the moving body 10 moves to a position where the vector C1 intersects with the vector B1
  • the moving body 10 obtains an outer product (B1 ⁇ C1) between the vector B1 and the vector C1
  • the sign of the outer product (B1 ⁇ C1) is positive, the status output
  • the control system 50 is requested to transmit the status information set for the section G1.
  • the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, and if the state information is not permitted, the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. Or stop before that. Further, if the sign of the outer product (B1 ⁇ C1) is negative, the moving body 10 determines that the passage is not restricted by the passage control module M1 and passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided as it is. Further, in FIG. 3, the state output unit G1 in which the state indicated by the state information is the permitted state is represented by the solid line vector B1 marked with “ ⁇ ”, and the state indicated by the state information is the disallowed state output. The portion G1 is represented by a dotted line vector B1 marked with "x".
  • the moving body 10 when the moving body 10 moving in the predetermined area A1 toward the zone Z1 approaches the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, the moving body 10 is triggered by the approach to the state output unit G1. Then, the state information of the state output unit G1 is acquired from the control system 50. Then, the moving body 10 determines whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a disallowed state based on the state information of the state output unit G1. If the state information indicates the permitted state, the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and enters the zone Z1. If the state information indicates the disapproval state, the moving body 10 stops at or before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided.
  • the position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 is the confirmation position where the moving body 10 confirms the state information set for the state output unit G1. Since the direction and size of the vector C1 change depending on the state of the moving body 10, the position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 (that is, the confirmation position) changes.
  • the state of the moving body 10 includes the moving direction of the moving body 10, the moving speed, the weight of the moving body 10 (including the transported object), and the like. Then, the moving body 10 passes or stops based on the result of confirming the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 at the confirmation position in front of the state output unit G1, so that the state information indicates the non-permission state. In the case shown, the moving body 10 can be stopped at a safe position (confirmation position) before the status output unit G1.
  • the control system 50 of the present embodiment can control the passage of the moving body 10 by providing the passage control module M1 at a desired location on the map of the predetermined area A1. Therefore, when designing the movement route in which the moving body 10 moves within the predetermined area A1, by providing the traffic control module M1 at one or a plurality of places within the predetermined area A1, the moving body 10 moves within the predetermined area A1.
  • the passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled so that the vehicle can pass smoothly.
  • control system 50 of the present embodiment is realized by, for example, a server device, and includes a control unit 51, a communication unit 61, and a storage unit 62, as shown in FIG. ..
  • the communication unit 61 is configured to be able to communicate with each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • communicateable means that information can be exchanged directly or indirectly via a network NT1 or a repeater 70 or the like by an appropriate communication method of wired communication or wireless communication. That is, the control system 50 and each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 can exchange information with each other. Further, the control system 50 and the moving body 10 can communicate with each other bidirectionally. Therefore, both transmission of information from the control system 50 to the mobile body 10 and further transmission of information from the mobile body 10 to the control system 50 are possible.
  • each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 communicates with any of the plurality of repeaters 70 arranged in the predetermined area A1 by wireless communication using radio waves as a medium. Therefore, the control system 50 and the plurality of mobile bodies 10 indirectly communicate with each other via at least the network NT1 and the relay 70.
  • each relay device 70 is a device (access point) that relays communication between each mobile body 10 and the control system 50.
  • the repeater 70 communicates with the communication unit 61 of the control system 50 via the network NT1.
  • communication between the repeater 70 and the mobile body 10 does not require Wi-Fi (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), ZigBee (registered trademark), or a low-power radio that does not require a license.
  • Adopt wireless communication that complies with standards such as (specified low power wireless).
  • the network NT1 is not limited to the Internet, and for example, a local communication network within the predetermined area A1 or the operating company of the predetermined area A1 may be applied.
  • the storage unit 62 is realized by a non-transitory recording medium such as a rewritable nonvolatile semiconductor memory.
  • the storage unit 62 includes, for example, map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, information regarding the position of the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, position information regarding the position of the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1, and The state information and the like set for the state output unit G1 are stored.
  • the state output unit G1 is provided corresponding to the area Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and the state output unit G1 has no substance. Therefore, the control system 50 stores, as data, the traffic control module M1 virtually provided in the predetermined area A1 by storing information about the traffic control module M1 in the storage unit 62.
  • the control unit 51 mainly has, for example, a computer system including a memory and a processor. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the control unit 51 (for example, the functions of the detection unit 52 and the state control unit 53) are realized.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
  • the detection unit 52 Based on the current position information indicating the current position of the mobile unit 10 received by the communication unit 61 from the mobile unit 10 and the information on the zone Z1 stored in the storage unit 62, the detection unit 52 detects that the mobile unit 10 is in the zone Z1. It detects whether or not it exists. When the moving body 10 exists in the zone Z1, the detection unit 52 may further detect the number of moving bodies 10 in the zone Z1.
  • the state control unit 53 sets the states indicated by the state information set to the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 for one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 provided in the predetermined area A1 into a permitted state and a non-permitted state. To control either.
  • the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information directly or indirectly output by the state output unit G1 to be either a permitted state or a disallowed state, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, for example. ..
  • the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to the permitted state
  • the moving body 10 is provided with the state output unit G1 in the predetermined area A1 based on the state indicated by the state information. Can pass through the position.
  • the moving body 10 causes the state output unit G1 in the predetermined area A1 based on the state indicated by the state information. Stops at or before the position where is provided. In this way, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to be either the permitted state or the non-permitted state, so that the passage control module M1 allows the passage of the moving body 10. Can be changed to allow or disallow.
  • the state control unit 53 changes the direction of the vector B1 representing the state output unit G1 to set the directions determined by the state output unit G1 to the permitted state or the disallowed state in the first direction D1 and the first direction D1. It can be set to either of the two directions D2. Therefore, the control system 50 can control the passage of the moving body 10 in a desired direction by using the passage control module M1.
  • the control system 50 of the present embodiment indirectly controls the moving body 10 by using the state output unit G1. That is, the state control unit 53 can intermittently control the moving body 10 controlled according to the state information output from the state output unit G1 by controlling the state indicated by the state information. ..
  • the moving body 10 is an automatic guided vehicle for transporting the pallet 40 within the predetermined area A1, and the pallet 40 is loaded and autonomously travels to the destination.
  • the control system 50 communicates with the mobile unit 10 via the network NT1 and the relay 70 to control the movement of the mobile unit 10.
  • the moving body 10 autonomously travels on a flat moving surface 110 composed of, for example, the floor surface of a predetermined area A1.
  • the moving body 10 includes a storage battery and operates using the electric energy stored in the storage battery.
  • the moving body 10 travels on the moving surface 110 with the pallets 40 loaded. Thereby, the moving body 10 can transport the pallet 40 placed at one place to another place in the predetermined area A1, for example.
  • the moving body 10 includes a main body 11.
  • the main body 11 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the two forks 12 project rearward from the lower portion of the main body 11, and the pallets 40 are stacked on the forks 12 by scooping up the pallets 40 with the two forks 12. Further, the moving body 10 can move down the pallet 40 from the forks 12 by moving forward while lifting the front sides of the two forks 12.
  • the moving body 10 has a plurality of (for example, four) wheels below the main body 11 and the two forks 12. Of the four wheels, at least two wheels provided at the bottom of the main body 11 are drive wheels, and the drive wheels are individually driven so that the moving body 10 moves in a desired direction along the moving surface 110. Can be moved to.
  • the drive wheels of the plurality of wheels may be omnidirectional wheels such as omni wheels, for example.
  • the moving body 10 includes a control unit 21, a communication unit 31, a position detection unit 33, a traveling device 34, and a storage unit 32.
  • the control unit 21, the communication unit 31, the position detection unit 33, the traveling device 34, and the storage unit 32 of the moving body 10 are mounted on the main body unit 11.
  • the communication unit 31 communicates with the control system 50 (the communication unit 61 of the control system 50) via the relay 70 and the network NT1.
  • the communication unit 31 communicates with the repeater 70 by a wireless communication method.
  • the storage unit 32 is realized by a non-transitory recording medium such as a rewritable nonvolatile semiconductor memory.
  • the storage unit 32 stores, for example, map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, information regarding the position of the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and position information regarding the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1. Store information.
  • the position detection unit 33 detects the current position information regarding the current position of the moving body 10 within the predetermined area A1.
  • the position detection unit 33 includes, for example, a receiver that receives beacon signals transmitted by radio waves from a plurality of transmitters.
  • the plurality of transmitters are arranged at a plurality of locations within the predetermined area A1 in which the moving body 10 moves.
  • the position detection unit 33 measures the current position of the mobile body 10 based on the positions of the plurality of transmitters and the received radio wave intensity of the beacon signal at the receiver.
  • the position detection unit may be realized by using a satellite positioning system such as GPS (Global Positioning System).
  • the mobile unit 10 periodically transmits the detection result of the position detection unit 33 from the communication unit 31 to the control system 50 at predetermined transmission time intervals (for example, one second intervals).
  • the mobile body 10 may irregularly transmit the detection result of the position detection unit 33 from the communication unit 31 to the control system 50 in response to a transmission request or the like from the control system 50.
  • the traveling device 34 receives a control command from the control unit 21 and drives a plurality of driving wheels provided in the main body portion 11 to drive the moving body 10 in a desired direction.
  • the control unit 21 mainly has, for example, a computer system including a memory and a processor. That is, the functions of the control unit 21 (for example, the functions of the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, the travel control unit 23, etc.) are realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system. It The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
  • the route acquisition unit 22 acquires route information regarding the movement route of the mobile body 10 from the control system 50 via the communication unit 31.
  • the route acquisition unit 22 acquires work information regarding the content of the work executed by the mobile body 10 from the control system 50 via the communication unit 31, and determines the movement route of the mobile body 10 based on the work information.
  • the route information may be acquired. For example, when the work information that the moving body 10 in the first area 201 (see FIG. 6) carries a load from the first area 201 to the third area 203 is acquired, the route acquisition unit 22 of the moving body 10 performs this work. Acquire route information based on the information. That is, the route acquisition unit 22 moves the moving body 10 from the position where the luggage is loaded in the first area 201 to the position where the luggage is unloaded in the third area 203 through the aisle area 204 based on the work information. Get the travel route.
  • the state information acquisition unit 24 acquires the state information output by the state output unit G1 when the moving body 10 moves to the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1.
  • the control unit 21 determines whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a disallowed state based on the state information of the state output unit G1 acquired by the state information acquisition unit 24, and the state output unit according to the determination result. Determine whether to pass or stop where G1 is located.
  • the traveling control unit 23 controls the traveling device 34 to cause the moving body 10 to travel (move) in a desired direction.
  • the traveling control unit 23 causes the moving body 10 to travel according to the route information acquired by the route acquisition unit 22, for example.
  • control system 50 updates the state information of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1 and transmits the state information in response to a request from the mobile body 10. The process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
  • the control unit 51 of the control system 50 updates the current position information of the mobile unit 10 when the communication unit 61 receives the current position information transmitted from the mobile unit 10 periodically (for example, every one second) (S1: Yes). Then, it is stored in the storage unit 62. At this time, the detection unit 52 performs a detection process for detecting the presence or absence of the moving body 10 in the area Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1 based on the current position information received by the communication unit 61 (S2). When the moving body 10 exists in the area Z1, the detection unit 52 further detects the number of moving bodies 10 existing in one area Z1 based on the current position information transmitted from the plurality of moving bodies 10. May be.
  • the state control unit 53 corresponds to the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the area Z1 based on the detection result by the detection unit 52 or the like.
  • the information is set to the permitted state or the disallowed state (S3).
  • the state control unit 53 disallows the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G1 and moves the moving body 10 into the area Z1.
  • the state control unit 53 permits the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G1 and moves the moving body 10 into the area Z1. To give permission.
  • the state control unit 53 stores in the storage unit 62 the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1 set in the process of S3.
  • the communication unit 61 receives a request signal requesting the output of the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1 from any of the mobile bodies 10 (S4: Yes), the state control unit 53 corresponds to the state output unit G1. Then, the communication unit 61 transmits the set status information to the requesting mobile unit 10 (S5), and the process ends.
  • the control unit 51 of the control system 50 periodically executes the above-described processing to update the state information of the state output unit G1 and, when receiving the request for the state information from the mobile unit 10, the requesting mobile unit 10 Then, the status information set corresponding to the status output unit G1 is transmitted.
  • the state control unit 53 states if the number of the moving bodies 10 existing in the area Z1 is less than the predetermined limit number.
  • the state indicated by the state information corresponding to the output unit G1 may be the permitted state.
  • the control system 50 controls the passage of the moving body 10 so as to allow the moving body 10 to move into the area Z1 until the number of the moving bodies 10 existing in the area Z1 reaches the limit number. be able to.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 4 is merely an example of the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, and the order of processing may be changed as appropriate, or the processing may be appropriately added or omitted.
  • the position detection unit 33 of the moving body 10 sequentially updates the current position where the moving body 10 exists in the predetermined area A1, and the control unit 21 transmits the current position information detected by the position detecting unit 33 from the communication unit 31.
  • the control system 50 is made to transmit (S11).
  • the control unit 21 approaches the position where the state output unit G1 is provided based on the current position information and the position information of the state output unit G1 stored in the storage unit 32. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S12). Here, if the vector C1 representing the moving speed and the moving direction of the moving body 10 intersects the vector B1 representing the state output unit G1, the control unit 21 determines that the position where the state output unit G1 is provided is approached. To do.
  • control unit 21 determines that the position where the state output unit G1 is provided is approached in the determination of S12 (S12: Yes)
  • the control unit 21 communicates a request signal requesting the state information of the state output unit G1.
  • the control unit 50 is transmitted from the unit 31 (S13).
  • the state information acquisition unit 24 acquires the state information via the communication unit 31, and the control unit 21 based on the state information. It is determined whether to pass or stop the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. That is, if the state information received in the process S14 is the permitted state (S15: Yes), the control unit 21 controls the moving body 10 so as to pass through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. On the other hand, if the state information received in the process S14 is an unauthorized state (S15: No), the control unit 21 controls the moving body 10 so as to stop before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. When the control unit 21 cannot receive the state information from the control system 50 even though the request signal is transmitted, it is preferable that the control unit 21 stops at the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, and the moving body 10 is safe. Passing can be realized.
  • the control unit 21 of the moving body 10 is provided with the state output unit G1 depending on whether the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 is a permitted state or a disallowed state. Decide whether to pass or stop the position.
  • the control system 50 uses the traffic control module M1 to control (setting) whether the status indicated by the status information set for the status output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 is a permitted status or a disallowed status. By doing so, the passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled. Therefore, the control system 50 can realize smooth passage of the moving body 10 by using the passage control module M1.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 5 is merely an example of the operation of the moving body 10, and the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate.
  • Operation example 1 An operation example 1 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 6.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic plan view of a predetermined area A1 in which a plurality of moving bodies 10 move.
  • the predetermined area A1 includes the first area 201, the second area 202, the third area 203, and the passage area 204 in the factory.
  • the first area 201 is an area where the first component is manufactured
  • the second area 202 is an area where the second component is manufactured.
  • the third area 203 is an area in which the first part manufactured in the first area 201 and the second part manufactured in the second area 202 are assembled.
  • the passage area 204 is an area that serves as a passage that connects the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203.
  • the moving body 10 moves from the first area 201 or the second area 202 to the third area 203 through the passage area 204, for example. Further, the moving body 10 moves from the third area 203 to the first area 201 or the second area 202 through the passage area 204, for example.
  • the control system 50 controls the passage of the moving body 10 in the passage area 204 so that the moving body 10 does not pass each other in the passage area 204. That is, the control system 50 makes the passage of the moving body 10 in the passage area 204 in the direction from the first area 201 or the second area 202 to the passage area 204, and from the third area 203 to the first area 201 or the second. It is switched alternately in the direction toward the area 202.
  • the control system 50 sets the passage area 204 in the predetermined area A1 as the zone Z11, and three state output units G11, G12, G13 are set corresponding to the zone Z11.
  • the traffic control module M11 including the area Z11 and the state output units G11, G12, and G13 provided corresponding to the area Z11 is provided.
  • the state output unit G11 is provided near the entrance 211 that connects the first area 201 and the zone Z11.
  • the state output unit G12 is provided near the doorway 212 that connects the second area 202 and the zone Z11.
  • the state output unit G13 is provided near the doorway 213 that connects the third area 203 and the zone Z11.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in the area Z11, and the state control unit 53 detects the state output units G11, G12, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52.
  • the state indicated by the state information set for G13 is controlled. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the zone Z11, the state control unit 53 alternately repeats the first state and the second state with a predetermined cycle.
  • the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 is information indicating a permission state
  • the state information set for the state output unit G13 is information indicating a non-permission state. It is in a state.
  • the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 is information indicating a non-permitted state
  • the state information set for the state output unit G13 is information indicating a permitted state. It is in a state.
  • the moving body 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 can enter the passage area 204, and the moving body 10 existing in the third area 203 can enter the passage area 204.
  • the first state is a state in which the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the first area 201 and the second area 202 can move to the third area 203 through the passage area 204.
  • one or more moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 or the second area 202 enter the passage area 204 (zone Z11), and the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 moves the moving body 10 to the zone Z11.
  • the state control unit 53 When detecting the presence, the state control unit 53 holds the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 in the first state. As a result, the moving body 10 existing in the third area 203 cannot move to the passage area 204, and one or more moving bodies 10 entering the passage area 204 from the first area 201 or the second area 202 Only one-way movement to the aisle area 204 is possible. After that, when one or a plurality of moving bodies 10 existing in the passage area 204 all move to the third area 203 and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204, the state control unit 53 is in the first state. The state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 is controlled (set) so that the above and the second state are alternately repeated at a predetermined cycle.
  • the moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 cannot enter the passage area 204, and the moving bodies 10 existing in the third area 203 enter the passage area 204. You can Therefore, in the second state, the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the third area 203 can move to the first area 201 or the second area 202 through the passage area 204.
  • one or more moving bodies 10 existing in the third area 203 enter the passage area 204 (area Z11), and the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects that the moving body 10 exists in the area Z11. Then, the state control unit 53 holds the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 in the second state.
  • the moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 cannot move to the passage area 204, and one or a plurality of moving bodies 10 that have entered the passage area 204 from the third area 203 pass through the passage. Only one-way movement to the area 204 is possible.
  • the state control unit 53 Controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 so that the first state and the second state are alternately repeated at a predetermined cycle.
  • control system 50 alternately switches the one-way passage between the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203, and thereby the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203.
  • the moving body 10 can be smoothly passed to and from the area 203.
  • the control operation of the state control unit 53 described in Operation Example 1 is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.
  • the state control unit 53 sets the state output units G11 to G13 when there is no moving body 10 in the passage area 204 (area Z11) and there is no request signal for requesting state information from the moving body 10. You may control all the states indicated by the state information to be performed to the disallowed state.
  • the moving body 10 requests the control system 50 for the state information of the state output unit G11. Send a signal.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal requesting the state information of the state output unit G11 from the moving body 10 existing in the first area 201, the moving body 10 does not exist in the aisle area 204.
  • the state information of the state output units G11 to G13 is controlled so that the movement from the first area 201 to the passage area 204 is permitted.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 uses the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 as information indicating the permitted state, and the state information set for the state output unit G13 indicates the non-permitted state. Information. As a result, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 determines that the passage of the moving body 10 in the aisle area 204 can be moved from the first area 201 and the second area 202 to the third area 203 through the aisle area 204. To do. Then, when the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the first area 201 moves to the third area 203 and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 is in a state.
  • the status information set for the output units G11, G12, and G13 is all information indicating the disallowed status.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 has the state output units G11 to G13. All the status information output by is the information indicating the disallowed status. Then, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal requesting the state information from the mobile body 10 existing in any of the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203, and then outputs the state output unit.
  • the state information set for G11 to G13 is controlled to either the first state or the second state, and the moving body 10 that has transmitted the request signal is allowed to move to the passage area 204.
  • the state control unit 53 sets all the state information set for the state output units G11 to G13 as information indicating the non-permission state.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal from the mobile unit 10 and determines the state indicated by the state information set to the state output units G11 to G13, and sets the determined state. Are switching. Until the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information set for the state output units G11 to G13 by using the request signal from the mobile unit 10 as a trigger, the state output units G11 to G13 are set. Since all the state information to be performed is in a disallowed state, it is possible to prevent the moving body 10 from entering the passage area 204 in this state, and it is possible to realize smooth passage.
  • the state control unit 53 controls, for each of the plurality of state output units G1 included in the one or more traffic control modules M1, whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a non-permitted state.
  • the state control unit 53 can realize smooth passage of the moving body 10 by connecting and controlling (setting) the states indicated by the state information output from the plurality of state output units G11 to G13.
  • the state control unit 53 sets the states indicated by the state information output by the state output units G1 (G11 to G13) of the plurality of traffic control modules M1 (M11) provided in a plurality of places to the permitted state and the non-permitted state. It may be controlled to either of the above, and smooth passage of the moving body 10 can be realized.
  • Operation example 2 An operation example 2 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 7.
  • FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move.
  • the area where the four passages 211 to 214 intersect in the predetermined area A1 is a zone Z21, and the state output parts G21, G22, corresponding to the portions where the passages 211, 212, 213 are connected in the zone Z21.
  • G23 is provided. That is, the predetermined area A1 is provided with the traffic control module M21 including the area Z21 and the state output units G21, G22, and G23 provided corresponding to the area Z21.
  • the traffic control module M21 includes a plurality of state output units G21, G22, G23 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 211, 212, 213 connected to the area Z21, respectively.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 indicates the state indicated by the state information output by each of the state output units G21, G22, and G23 provided corresponding to the area Z21 as a permitted state and a disallowed state. Control (set) to one of.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 is present in the zone Z21, and the state control unit 53, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, outputs the state output units G21, G22, It controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by G23.
  • the state control unit 53 sequentially changes the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state in order every time a predetermined switching time elapses. repeat.
  • the state control unit 53 sequentially changes the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state in order every time a predetermined switching time elapses. repeat.
  • the state control unit 53 sequentially changes the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state in order every time a predetermined switching time elapses. repeat.
  • the state information set for the state output unit G21 is the information indicating the permitted state.
  • the second switching state only the state information set for the state output unit G22 is the information indicating the permitted state.
  • the moving body 10 existing in the passage 211 can enter the area Z21, and the moving body 10 existing in the passages 212 and 213 cannot enter the area Z21. Therefore, in the first switching state, only the moving body 10 existing in the passage 211 can move to the passage 214 through the zone Z21.
  • the state control unit 53 refers to the state output units G21, G22, and G23. All the set status information is information indicating the disallowed status. Accordingly, the moving body 10 existing in the passages 211, 212, and 213 cannot continuously enter the zone Z21 which is the intersection, and the moving body 10 that has entered the zone Z21 can be smoothly moved to the passage 214. You can
  • the state control unit 53 switches the state information set for the state output units G21 to G23 into the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state. It repeats cyclically in the order of states.
  • the traffic control module M21 includes a plurality of state output units G21 to G23 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 211 to 213 connected to the area Z21, respectively.
  • the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by one of the plurality of state output units G21 to G23 to the permitted state, the state control unit 53 outputs the remaining state of the plurality of state output units G21 to G23.
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the unit is controlled to the disallowed state.
  • the control system 50 can realize smooth passage even when the moving body 10 passes through a plurality of passages.
  • Operation example 3 An operation example 3 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 8.
  • FIG. 8 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move.
  • the predetermined area A1 two adjacent areas in the middle of the passage 215 are defined as zones Z31 and Z32.
  • a state output unit G31 is provided at a position corresponding to the zone Z31 and entering the zone Z31 from the side opposite to the zone Z32.
  • a state output part G32 is provided at a position corresponding to the zone Z32 and entering the zone Z32 from the side opposite to the zone Z31.
  • the traffic control module M31 including the zone Z31 and the state output unit G31 provided corresponding to the zone Z31 and the state output provided corresponding to the zones Z32 and Z32 in the predetermined area A1.
  • a traffic control module M32 including a section G32.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 allows the states indicated by the state information output from the state output units G31 and G32 provided corresponding to the zones Z31 and Z32 to the permitted state and the non-permitted state, respectively. Control (set) to any of the above.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in the areas Z31 and Z32, and the state control unit 53 detects the state output unit G31, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52. It controls the state indicated by the state information output by G32. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the area Z31 and the area Z32, the state control unit 53 controls only the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G31 to the permitted state, and the state output unit. The state in which only the state indicated by the state information set for G32 is controlled to the permitted state is alternately switched. Further, when the moving body 10 is present in at least one of the area Z31 and the area Z32, the state control unit 53 controls both the state information set for the state output units G31 and G32 to the disallowed state.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 has the state information set for the state output unit G31 and the state information set for the state output unit G32. And are alternately controlled to the permitted state, and the zones Z31 and Z32 can be passed from either direction. Then, in a state where the moving body 10 exists in at least one of the areas Z31 and Z32, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 disallows both the state information set for the state output units G31 and G32, respectively. To control. As a result, entry into the zones Z31, Z32 is prohibited, and smooth passage of the moving body 10 existing in the zones Z31, Z32 can be realized.
  • a plurality of areas Z31 and Z32 are provided along the path on which the moving body 10 moves in the predetermined area A1, and the plurality of areas Z31 and Z32 are arranged at desired locations to move.
  • the smooth passage of the body 10 can be realized.
  • Operation example 4 An operation example 4 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 9 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move.
  • the area where the one-way passage 222 and the passage 222 meet is defined as the area Z41, and the passage in the passage 221.
  • the area that merges with 223 is referred to as zone Z43.
  • the area where the passage 221 merges is designated as the standby area Z42, and in the passage 223, the area where the passage 221 merges is designated as the standby area Z44.
  • a state output unit G42 is provided between the area Z41 and the standby area Z42 corresponding to the area 41, and the state output unit G41 is provided in front of the area Z41 (the side where the moving body 10 enters) in the passage 221. It is provided. Further, corresponding to the area 43, the state output unit G44 is provided between the area Z43 and the standby area Z44, and the state output unit G43 is provided in front of the area Z43 in the passage 221.
  • the traffic control module M41 is composed of the area Z41 and the state output units G41 and G42 provided in the plurality of passages 211 and 222 connected to the area Z41, and the area Z43 and the plurality of passages 221 connected to the area Z43.
  • a traffic control module M43 is configured with the status output units G43 and G44 provided in 223. That is, the traffic control modules M41 and M43 include a plurality of state output units G41 to G44 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 221, 222 and 223 connected to the areas Z41 and Z43, respectively.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 causes the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 to give priority to the moving body 10A passing through the passage 221 over the moving body 10B trying to enter the passage 221 from the passages 222 and 223. Controls the state indicated by the state information output by G44.
  • the storage unit 62 of the control system 50 stores the position information of the zones Z41, Z43 and the standby areas Z42, Z44, and the detection unit 52 causes the moving body 10 to move in each of the zones Z41, Z43 and the standby areas Z42, Z44.
  • the presence or absence of (10A, 10B) is detected.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G41 and G43 to the permitted state when the moving body 10 does not exist in the standby areas Z42 and Z44, and the state output unit The state indicated by the state information output by G42 and G44 is controlled to the non-permission state.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 can pass through the positions where the state output units G41 and G43 are provided as they are, and the moving body 10 can be smoothly moved in the passage 221.
  • the moving body 10B existing in the passages 222 and 223 stops at the position where the state output units G42 and G44 are provided the possibility of obstructing the passage of the moving body 10A moving in the passage 221 can be reduced.
  • the state control unit 53 outputs, for example, the state output unit G41 at the first time point after the predetermined first delay time has elapsed.
  • the status indicated by the status information is changed from the permitted status to the disallowed status.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 stops before the state output unit G41.
  • the state control unit 53 has a second time point after a predetermined second delay time (standby time) has elapsed from the first time point when the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G41 is changed to the disallowed state. Then, the state indicated by the state information output by the switching target state output unit G42 is changed from the disapproval state to the permission state. Accordingly, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 can be entered into the passage 221 in a state where the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 is stopped before the state output unit G41, and smooth passage can be realized.
  • a predetermined second delay time standby time
  • Operation example 5 An operation example 5 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 10.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move.
  • the one-way passage 232 merges with the one-way passage 231.
  • the zone Z51 is provided in the area where the passage 232 merges in the passage 231.
  • An adjacent area Z52 is provided in an area adjacent to the Z51.
  • the adjacent area Z52 is on the front side in the traveling direction with respect to the area Z51.
  • a standby area Z53 is provided in an area adjacent to the area Z51 in the passage 232.
  • two state output units G51 and G52 are provided corresponding to the area Z51.
  • the state output unit G51 is provided between the area Z51 and the adjacent area Z52, and the state output unit G52 is provided between the area Z51 and the standby area Z53.
  • a zone Z51 and state output sections G51 and G52 provided corresponding to the zone Z51 are included in the traffic control module M51, and the state control section 53 of the control system 50 controls the state output sections G51 and G52. Control (set) the state indicated by the state information set in the above to either the permitted state or the disallowed state.
  • the storage unit 62 of the control system 50 stores position information of the zone Z51, the adjacent area Z52, and the standby area Z53.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the mobile body 10 exists in each of the zone Z51, the adjacent area Z52, and the standby area Z53, based on the current position information transmitted from the mobile body 10. Then, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G51 and G52 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52.
  • the state control unit 53 permits the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G51, and the state information output by the state output unit G52.
  • the indicated state as the disallowed state
  • the moving body 10A passing through the passage 231 is allowed to pass as it is, and the moving body 10B passing through the passage 232 is stopped before the state output unit G52.
  • the state control unit 53 receives the state information output by the state output unit G51.
  • the indicated state is regarded as a disallowed state
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G52 is regarded as a permitted state
  • the moving body 10B existing in the passage 232 is permitted to move to the passage 231.
  • the control system 50 gives priority to the passage of the passage 231 over the passage 232, and the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G51 is normally set to the permitted state. Therefore, it takes a certain amount of time for the moving body 10 passing through the passage 231 to stop from the traveling state.
  • the state control unit 53 does not have the moving body 10 in both the zone Z51 connected to the standby area Z53 and the adjacent area Z52 in front of the zone Z51. In the state, the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G52 is changed to the permitted state.
  • Operation example 6 An operation example 6 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 (10A) by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG.
  • FIG. 11 shows an application example in which the control system 50 is applied to a roundabout type intersection.
  • four passages 241 to 244 are connected to an annular passage 240 through which the moving body 10 passes counterclockwise in a plan view. Then, in the annular passage 240, passage control modules M61 to M64 are provided in the areas where the four passages 241 to 244 merge, respectively.
  • the passage control module M61 includes a zone Z61 provided in the area where the passage 241 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G611 and G612 provided corresponding to the zone Z61.
  • the moving body 10 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the area Z61 based on the state information output by the state output unit G611.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 241 determines whether or not to permit passage to the zone Z61 based on the state information output by the state output unit G612.
  • the passage control module M62 includes an area Z62 provided in the area where the passage 242 joins in the passage 240, and state output units G621 and G622 provided corresponding to the area Z62.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether to permit passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z62 based on the state information output by the state output unit G621. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 242 determines whether or not to permit passage to the zone Z62, based on the state information output by the state output unit G622.
  • the passage control module M63 includes a zone Z63 provided in an area where the passage 243 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G631 and G632 provided corresponding to the zone Z63.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z63 based on the state information output by the state output unit G631. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 243 determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10 to pass through the area Z63 based on the state information output by the state output unit G632.
  • the passage control module M64 includes an area Z64 provided in an area where the passage 244 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G641 and G642 provided corresponding to the area Z64.
  • the moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z64 based on the state information output by the state output unit G641. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 244 determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10 to pass through the area Z64 based on the state information output by the state output unit G642.
  • each of the passages 241 to 244 is provided with the standby areas Z65 to Z68 in an area that joins with the passage 240, and the position information of the standby areas Z65 to Z68 is registered in the storage unit 62. There is.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in each of the areas Z61 to Z64 and the standby areas Z65 to Z68 based on the current position information acquired from the moving body 10. .. Then, the state control unit 53 controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G611 to G641 and G612 to G642 included in the traffic control modules M61 to M64 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly control the traffic at the roundabout intersection.
  • the state control unit 53 allows the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G611, 621, 631, and G641 to be the permitted state and the state output unit G612. , 622,632,
  • the state indicated by the state information output by G642 is regarded as a disallowed state.
  • the moving body 10 cannot enter the passage 240 from the passages 241 to 244, and the passage of the moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 is prioritized.
  • the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G611 from the permitted state to the prohibited state. After that, when the predetermined standby time has elapsed, the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G611 from the disallowed state to the permitted state. As a result, the moving body 10A existing in the standby area Z241 can enter the passage 240.
  • Operation example 7 An operation example 7 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG.
  • the zone Z71 is provided in a part of the passage 251, and the state output unit G71 is provided corresponding to the zone Z71.
  • a stop prohibition area 252 (hatched portion in FIG. 12) is provided between the state output unit G71 provided corresponding to the area Z71 and the area Z71.
  • the stop prohibition area 252 is, for example, another passage that intersects with the passage 251.
  • Operation example 8 An operation example 8 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 13.
  • FIG. 13 shows an application example in which the control system 50 is applied to a predetermined area A1 in which an evacuation path 262 for passing each other is provided in the middle of the passage 261.
  • the area Z81 is provided in the area where one end of the evacuation path 262 joins (connects) with the passage 261, and the state output unit G81 is provided corresponding to the area Z81.
  • the state output unit G81 is provided at a position where one end of the evacuation path 262 is connected to the passage 261 and determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10C existing in the evacuation path 262 to enter the passage 261.
  • a zone Z82 is provided in an area where the other end of the evacuation path 262 joins (connects) with the passage 261, and a state output unit G82 is provided corresponding to the zone Z82.
  • the state output unit G82 is provided at a position where the other end of the retreat path 262 is connected in the passage 261, and determines whether or not the moving body 10B existing in the passage 261 is allowed to enter the zone Z82.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in each of the zones Z81 to Z82. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the zones Z81 to Z82, the state control unit 53 controls the states indicated by the state information output by the state output units G81 and G82 to be the permitted state and allows the moving body 10 to pass. To give permission. On the other hand, when the moving body 10A is present in the zone Z81, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G81 to the non-permitted state, and the moving body 10C present in the evacuation path 262 is Restrict movement to zone Z81.
  • the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G82 to be the non-permission state, and moves in the passage 261 toward the zone Z82.
  • the moving body 10B is stopped before the state output unit G82. As a result, the moving body 10D can move to the evacuation path 262 without being obstructed by the moving body 10B.
  • the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G81 and G82 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, and the moving body 10 smoothly passes by. It can be controlled so that it can be done.
  • Operation example 9 An operation example 9 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 14.
  • a traffic control module M91 is provided in a standby area provided in front of the charging spaces SP1 and SP2 of the moving body 10 in the predetermined area A1.
  • the traffic control module M91 includes a zone Z91 provided in the standby area and a state output unit G91 provided corresponding to the zone Z91.
  • the state information output by the state output unit G91 is information indicating whether the state is a permission state in which the moving body 10 is permitted to enter the zone Z91 from the passage 271 connected to the zone Z91, or a non-permission state.
  • the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the mobile body 10 exists in the zone Z91 and the charging spaces SP1 and SP2.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G91 to be either a permitted state or a disallowed state, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52.
  • the state control unit 53 sets the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G91.
  • the mobile body 10 is controlled in the non-permitted state and stopped before the state output unit G91.
  • the state control unit 53 indicates the state information output by the state output unit G91.
  • the state is controlled to the permitted state, and the moving body 10 is made to enter the area Z91.
  • nodes ND1 and ND2 indicating the stop position of the moving body 10 are set in the area Z91.
  • Chargers 301 and 302 are installed in the charging spaces SP1 and SP2, and nodes ND3 and ND4 indicating the stop positions of the moving body 10 are set in the charging spaces SP1 and SP2.
  • the mobile unit 10 stores in the storage unit 32 the position information of the nodes ND1 to ND4 and the position information regarding the installation positions of the chargers 301 and 302.
  • the moving body 10 has the moving body 10 among the nodes ND1 and ND2. Stop at the node position corresponding to no charging space.
  • the mobile body 10 stops at, for example, the node ND1
  • the mobile body 10 moves from the node ND1 to the node ND3 in the charging space SP1 and is then connected to the charger 301 to be charged.
  • the mobile unit 10 leaves the charger 301, moves to the node ND3, and moves from the node ND3 to the node ND1.
  • the moving body 10 goes out of the zone Z91 and moves to a desired position in the predetermined area A1.
  • the first embodiment described above is only one of various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the first embodiment can be variously modified according to the design and the like as long as the object of the present disclosure can be achieved.
  • the same function as the control system 50 may be embodied by a control method of the control system 50, a computer program, a non-transitory recording medium recording the program, or the like.
  • the control method of the control system 50 according to one aspect controls the passage of the moving body 10 moving in the predetermined area A1.
  • the control method includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process.
  • the first setting process is a process of setting the zone Z1 in a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the moving body 10 moves.
  • the second setting process is a process of providing a state output unit G1 for outputting the state information, corresponding to the zone Z1.
  • the state information indicates whether the moving state of the moving body 10 is permitted in at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2, or whether the moving body 10 is not permitted. This is the information to be shown.
  • the first direction D1 is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the outside to the inside of the zone Z1.
  • the second direction D2 is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the inside of the zone Z1 to the outside.
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 is controlled to be the permitted state or the disallowed state.
  • a (computer) program according to one aspect is a program for causing a computer system to execute a process of controlling the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to a permitted state or a disallowed state.
  • the first embodiment may be referred to as a “basic example”.
  • the control system 50 in the present disclosure includes a computer system.
  • the computer system mainly comprises a processor as a hardware and a memory.
  • the function as the control system 50 in the present disclosure is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. readable by the computer system. May be provided.
  • a processor in a computer system is composed of one or more electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit (IC) or a large scale integrated circuit (LSI).
  • IC semiconductor integrated circuit
  • LSI large scale integrated circuit
  • the integrated circuit such as an IC or an LSI referred to here has a different name depending on the degree of integration, and includes an integrated circuit called a system LSI, VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration), or ULSI (Ultra Large Scale Integration).
  • FPGAs Field-Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the plurality of electronic circuits may be integrated in one chip, or may be distributed and provided in the plurality of chips.
  • the plurality of chips may be integrated in one device, or may be distributed and provided in the plurality of devices.
  • the computer system referred to here includes a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories. Therefore, the microcontroller is also composed of one or a plurality of electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit or a large scale integrated circuit.
  • control system 50 it is not an essential configuration for the control system 50 that a plurality of functions in the control system 50 are integrated in one housing, and the components of the control system 50 are distributed and provided in the plurality of housings. May be. Furthermore, at least a part of the functions of the control system 50, for example, a part of the functions of the state control unit 53 and the like may be realized by a cloud (cloud computing) or the like.
  • the traffic control module M1 may have an entity provided at a desired position in the predetermined area A1.
  • the control system 50 includes the traffic control module M1 arranged in the predetermined area A1, and controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 to be the permitted state or the non-permitted state. ..
  • the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 may output the state information by any one of light, sound, and radio waves, and the moving body 10 outputs any one of light, sound, and radio waves by the state output unit G1.
  • the state information output by is directly obtained, and it is determined whether to move or stop based on the state information.
  • the state output unit G1 is provided in a position corresponding to the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1 in the real space, and determines whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in at least one of the first direction and the second direction.
  • the state information shown may be directly output to the moving body 10 by light, sound, a radio wave signal, or the like.
  • the state control unit 53 may control the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 according to the purpose for which the moving body 10 moves (for example, the type of luggage carried by the moving body 10). Good. For example, when it is desired to deliver the package carried by the mobile unit 10 to the destination earlier, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to be the permitted state and preferentially. You may pass by.
  • the state information output by the state output unit G1 indicates whether or not the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in the first direction D1, but the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in the second direction D2. It may indicate whether or not to do so. Further, the state information output by the state output unit G1 may indicate whether or not the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in both the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
  • the moving body 10 carries the pallet 40, but the article carried by the moving body 10 is not limited to the pallet 40, and articles other than the pallet 40 may be carried. Further, the moving body 10 is not limited to a carrying device that carries articles, and may be a moving body that carries people. Further, the moving body 10 is a carrier vehicle that travels in the predetermined area A1, but the moving body 10 may be a ship (autonomous traveling ship) or an aircraft (drone). When the mobile body 10 is an autonomous navigation ship, the water area in which the autonomous navigation ship travels is the predetermined area A1, and when the mobile body 10 is a drone, the space in which the drone flies is the predetermined area A1.
  • the control system 50 includes an acquisition unit 54 and a consideration generation unit 55.
  • the acquisition unit 54 acquires operation information regarding the operations of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 in the predetermined area A1.
  • the consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54.
  • the control system 50 controls the plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in the predetermined area A1.
  • the "compensation” referred to in the present disclosure is an incentive or a penalty generated for each of a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the “compensation” is realized by, for example, benefits including services such as money (including credits and virtual currency), points (points), goods, and maintenance of the moving body 10.
  • a compensation for any one of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 is generated. Therefore, in the moving body 10, motivation (motivation) is given to perform a specific movement. For example, when there is a possibility that the movements of a plurality of mobile units 10 interfere with each other, an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change that avoids the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies 10 that can cause interference, by positively adopting an operation including a route change that avoids the interference, the operation including the route change is a specific movement. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the body 10. As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among a plurality of moving bodies 10.
  • the mobile body system 1 of the present embodiment includes a control system 50 and a plurality of mobile bodies 10 as shown in FIG.
  • the control system 50 has a host system 51A.
  • Each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 has a lower system 21A.
  • the "upper” of the upper system 51A and the like and the “lower” of the lower system 21A and the like are simply used as labels for distinguishing between the two, and have the meaning of specifying their respective positions and ranks. is not.
  • each of the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A has a computer system including a memory and a processor as a main configuration. That is, each function of the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
  • the host system 51A included in the control system 50 is a system for integrally controlling a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
  • the lower system 21A included in the mobile unit 10 is a system for actually controlling the individual mobile units 10 according to an instruction from the upper system 51A.
  • the control system 50 indirectly controls the plurality of moving bodies 10 by issuing an instruction from the upper system 51A to the lower system 21A of each moving body 10.
  • the control system 50 according to the present embodiment is realized by, for example, a server device, and includes a host system 51A, a communication unit 61, and a storage unit 62, as shown in FIG. Since the communication unit 61 and the storage unit 62 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the upper system 51A has a detection unit 52, a state control unit 53, an acquisition unit 54, a consideration generation unit 55, and a cooperation control unit 56.
  • the upper system 51A mainly has a computer system including a memory and a processor, for example. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the host system 51A (for example, the detection unit 52, the state control unit 53, the acquisition unit 54, the consideration generation unit 55, and the cooperation control unit 56). And other functions) are realized.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
  • the detection unit 52 and the state control unit 53 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the acquisition unit 54 acquires operation information regarding the operation of the plurality of mobile units 10 in the predetermined area A1.
  • the "motion information" referred to in the present disclosure includes general movements of the moving body 10, for example, current position information indicating the current position of the moving body 10 in a predetermined area A1, and moving speed and moving direction of the moving body 10. Including information such as.
  • the acquisition unit 54 may acquire the operation information from the mobile unit 10 via the communication unit 61, or may acquire the operation information within the host system 51A. That is, since the host system 51A handles information related to the control of the mobile unit 10, the information handled within the host system 51A also includes information about the operation of the mobile unit 10 (motion information). ..
  • the state output unit G1 preferentially controls the moving bodies 10 (priority moving bodies). Become.
  • the information handled by the state control unit 53 that is, the information used when the state control unit 53 performs the priority control on any one of the moving bodies 10 (priority moving bodies) is the moving body 10 (priority movement). It becomes the movement information about the movement of the body). Details of the priority control will be described in the section “(2.3.3) Priority control”.
  • the consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration for any one of the plurality of mobile units 10 based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54.
  • the “consideration” in the present disclosure includes at least one of an incentive and a penalty, as described above. Details of the consideration generating unit 55 will be described in the section “(2.3.1) Occurrence of consideration”.
  • the cooperative control unit 56 executes cooperative control.
  • one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is set as the target moving body, and the target moving body is controlled by controlling the cooperative moving body other than the target moving body among the plurality of moving bodies 10. It is a control to secure the course of.
  • the control of the cooperative moving body in the cooperative control unit 56 includes both movement and stop of the cooperative moving body. That is, the cooperative control unit 56 performs the cooperative control to stop the moving body 10 as the cooperative moving body at the end of the passage 100, for example, and the moving body 10 as the target moving body overtakes the cooperative moving body in the meantime. Thus, the moving body 10 as the target moving body can be controlled. Details of the cooperative control will be described in the section “(2.3.2) Cooperative control”.
  • the mobile body 10 includes a lower system 21A, a communication unit 31, a storage unit 32, a position detection unit 33, a traveling device 34, and a notification unit 35.
  • the lower system 21A of the mobile unit 10, the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detection unit 33, the traveling device 34, and the notification unit 35 are mounted on the main body unit 11. Since the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detection unit 33, and the traveling device 34 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detecting unit 33, and the traveling device 34 The description is omitted.
  • the notification unit 35 gives notification by sound and/or display (including light). As a result, the notification unit 35 can notify a person (worker or the like) around the moving body 10. In the present embodiment, the notification unit 35 performs notification at least during cooperative control.
  • the lower system 21A includes a route acquisition unit 22, a state information acquisition unit 24, a travel control unit 23, and a request generation unit 25.
  • the lower system 21A mainly has a computer system including a memory and a processor, for example. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the lower system 21A (for example, the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, the travel control unit 23, the request generation unit 25, and the like). Function) is realized.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card. Since the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, and the travel control unit 23 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description of the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, and the travel control unit 23 will be described. Omit it.
  • the request generation unit 25 generates a request (cooperative request) for starting cooperative control and transmits it to the control system 50.
  • any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is based on the operation of the consideration generation unit 55, that is, the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54.
  • the consideration generation process for generating the consideration will be described in detail.
  • the “compensation” in the present disclosure is an incentive or a penalty generated for each of the plurality of mobile units 10 as described above.
  • the “compensation” is realized by, for example, benefits including services such as money (including credits and virtual currency), points (points), goods, and maintenance of the moving body 10.
  • the owner of the control system 50 or the like receives the incentive benefit or the penalty as a consideration, and the owner or the like of the mobile body 10 receives the incentive or pays the penalty.
  • the settlement of consideration may be performed every time the work by the mobile body 10 is completed, or may be performed every predetermined calculation period (for example, one month).
  • consideration may occur in various situations. Therefore, hereinafter, the operation of the consideration generating unit 55 will be described for the cooperative control of the control system 50, the priority control, and other situations.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic plan view of a part of the predetermined area A1.
  • the predetermined area A1 includes a work area A11, a passage area A12, a passage area A13, and a waiting area A14.
  • the work area A11 is an area in which work by the moving body 10 is performed, and a plurality of objects 40 to be transported are arranged in the work area A11.
  • the passage areas A12 and A13 are areas that serve as passages connecting the work area A11 and other areas. For example, when performing a work (transport work of the transport object 40), the moving body 10 picks up the transport object 40 in the work area A11, passes through the passage area A12 or the passage area A13, and within the predetermined area A1. The object to be transported 40 is transported.
  • the standby area A14 is an area in which the moving body 10 waits for work (transportation work) in the work area A11.
  • the waiting area A14 constitutes a rotary-shaped passage so that the plurality of moving bodies 10 can be lined up in a ring and stand by.
  • a plurality of moving bodies 10 can stand by in a line.
  • six moving bodies 10 are waiting in a waiting line for waiting for work in the work area A11.
  • the moving body 10 located at the head of the waiting line among the moving bodies 10 of a plurality of units (6 units in this case) executes the work. .. That is, the moving body 10 located at the head of the waiting line enters the work area A11, picks up the conveyance target 40, and conveys the conveyance target 40.
  • FIGS. 17A to 17C are schematic plan views showing only the area of the standby area A14 (and its periphery) in the example of FIG.
  • six mobile bodies 10A to 10F form a waiting line in the waiting area A14.
  • each of the six moving bodies 10A to 10F is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
  • the control system 50 executes cooperative control.
  • the cooperative control is to control one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 as a target moving body and control a cooperative moving body other than the target moving body among the plurality of moving bodies 10.
  • the control is to secure the course of the target moving body.
  • the moving body 10C is the "target moving body”
  • the other moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F are the "cooperative moving bodies”.
  • the cooperation control unit 56 controls the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies by executing the cooperative control, and thus the moving body 10C as the target moving body.
  • the cooperative control is a control for smoothly moving the target moving body by asking the cooperation of the cooperating moving body when the target moving body moves.
  • the cooperative control unit 56 executes cooperative control in response to a request from the target mobile body.
  • the request generation unit 25 of the lower system 21A outputs a cooperation request to the control system 50, and the cooperation control unit 56 starts cooperative control.
  • the request from the moving body 10 includes a request from the lower system 21A that controls the moving body 10. That is, even when the lower system 21A is separate from the moving body 10, the request from the lower system 21A having the moving body 10 under its control is regarded as the request from the moving body 10.
  • the cooperative control is started only when there is a request from the mobile unit 10C as the target mobile unit. Therefore, the moving body 10C as the target moving body outputs a request (cooperation request), for example, when there is a need to exit the waiting line.
  • a request cooperation request
  • the remaining capacity of the storage battery decreases and it becomes necessary to move to the charging space set in the predetermined area A1, and the work area in the predetermined area A1
  • work other than A11 occurs.
  • the cooperative control unit 56 notifies the surroundings of the target moving body at the time of cooperative control. That is, when performing cooperative control, the cooperative control unit 56 makes a sound and / or informs a person (worker or the like) around the target moving body that the movement of the target moving body and the cooperative moving body is started. Notification is given by display (including light). Specifically, the cooperation control unit 56 causes the notification unit 35 of the target moving body to notify by sound and/or display by transmitting a notification signal to the target moving body. As a result, for example, when an obstacle is left in the path of the target moving object, it is possible to encourage people around the target moving object to remove the obstacle.
  • the moving body 10C as the target moving body performs notification by sound (horn).
  • the moving body 10C as the target moving body may start the notification at the same time as outputting the cooperation request, for example, without waiting for the notification signal from the cooperation control unit 56.
  • the cooperative control unit 56 sets only the mobile body 10 existing in the area related to the route of the target mobile body in the predetermined area A1 among the plurality of mobile bodies 10 as the cooperative mobile body. That is, if all the moving bodies 10 other than the target moving body existing in the predetermined area A1 are the cooperative moving bodies, the moving body 10 that is not related to the movement of the target moving body is forced to perform the cooperative control as the cooperative moving body. Become. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by focusing on the moving body 10 existing in the region related to the course of the target moving body and making it a cooperative moving body, it is possible to avoid forcing the unrelated moving body 10 to perform cooperative control. ..
  • the area related to the course of the target moving body includes not only the course of the target moving body but also the area indirectly related to the course of the target moving body such as the course of any cooperative moving body.
  • the cooperation control unit 56 selects the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F other than the moving body 10C (target moving body) among the plurality of moving bodies 10A to 10F located in the standby area A14 as “cooperating moving bodies”. ".
  • the cooperation control unit 56 secures the path of the target moving body by moving the cooperative moving body located on the path of the target moving body. That is, the cooperative control unit 56 vacates the course of the target moving body by moving the cooperative moving body on the course of the target moving body so as to evacuate from the course of the target moving body.
  • the cooperative mobile body gives way to the target mobile body to secure the path of the target mobile body, and the target mobile body can move on the path.
  • the moving bodies 10A and 10B as cooperative moving bodies are located on the path of the moving body 10C as the target moving body, that is, in front of the moving body 10C. Therefore, when the cooperative control is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the moving bodies 10A and 10B as cooperative moving bodies start moving. As a result, the moving body 10C as the target moving body can move from the standby area A14 to the aisle area A12. Further, in the present embodiment, the cooperation control unit 56 moves the moving bodies 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperative moving bodies so as to follow the moving body 10B.
  • the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies move so as to make one round (one lap) in the standby area A14 that constitutes the rotary-shaped passage, as shown in FIG. 17C.
  • the cooperative control unit 56 secures the course of the target moving body and moves the cooperative moving body to the position before the cooperative control after the movement of the target moving body is completed.
  • the order of the plurality of moving bodies 10 arranged in the waiting line from being significantly changed before and after the cooperative control.
  • the moving bodies 10D, 10E, and 10F are packed in front of the waiting line (on the moving body 10B side) by the amount of the moving body 10C.
  • the moving body 10C located in the middle of the waiting line can escape from the waiting line.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 generates a consideration for at least one of the target moving body and the cooperative moving body when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the above-described example, a consideration is generated for at least one of the moving body 10C as the target moving body and the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperating moving bodies.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for the target moving body when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, a penalty will be incurred for the moving body 10C as the target moving body.
  • a penalty will be incurred for the moving body 10C as the target moving body.
  • the coordinated control in order to make the target moving body movable, it is necessary to seek cooperation from the moving body 10 (cooperating moving body) other than the target moving body, which may lead to opportunity loss of the cooperative moving body. There is. Therefore, in order to prevent the mobile body 10 from silently using cooperative control as the target mobile body, it is preferable to impose a penalty on the mobile body 10 as the target mobile body.
  • the consideration generation unit 55 generates an incentive as a consideration for the cooperative mobile when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, an incentive is generated as a consideration for the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies.
  • an incentive is generated as a consideration for the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies.
  • the coordinated control in order to make the target moving body movable, it is necessary to seek cooperation from the moving body 10 (cooperating moving body) other than the target moving body, which may lead to opportunity loss of the cooperative moving body. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to pay an incentive to the moving body 10 which is a cooperative moving body in order to compensate for the disadvantage due to the cooperative control.
  • the penalty generated as a consideration for the target mobile unit and the incentive generated as a consideration for the cooperative mobile unit may be balanced with each other. This makes it possible to offset the penalties and incentives that accompany one coordinated control with each other.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic sequence diagram showing the cooperative control shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, including the operation of the consideration generating unit 55.
  • the cooperative control is started when the cooperative request (S21) is output from the mobile body 10C as the target mobile body to the control system 50.
  • the control system 50 Upon receiving the cooperation request, the control system 50 outputs a movement instruction (S22) to the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies.
  • the mobile bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as cooperative mobile bodies start the movement after accepting the movement instruction.
  • the control system 50 outputs a result notification (S23) to the moving body 10C as the target moving body when the moving body 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperative moving body receives a reply to the movement instruction.
  • the "result notification” here is a notification of the result for the cooperation request, and is a notification indicating whether or not the cooperation request from the target moving body has been accepted (accepted) by the cooperating moving body.
  • the control system 50 receives a reply from the cooperating mobile body to accept the movement instruction, the control system 50 determines that the cooperation request from the target mobile body has been accepted by the cooperating mobile body, and notifies the target mobile body of a result indicating the request acceptance. Is output.
  • the control system 50 determines that the cooperative request from the target moving body has not been accepted by the cooperating moving body, and rejects the request to the target moving body. Outputs a result notification indicating.
  • the mobile unit 10C as the target mobile unit starts moving upon receiving the result notification indicating the request acceptance.
  • control system 50 incurs a penalty (S24) as a consideration for the moving body 10C as the target moving body. Further, the control system 50 generates an incentive (S25) as a consideration for the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic plan view of a part of the predetermined area A1.
  • the predetermined area A1 includes a main line area A21 and a plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27.
  • the main area A21 is an area that serves as a passage for the moving body 10 to pass through, and in the example of FIG. 19, is a linear area extending in the left-right direction.
  • the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are all areas that serve as passages for the moving body 10 to pass through, and are connected to the main line area A21.
  • the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are all linear areas extending in the vertical direction.
  • an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A22 and A23 intersect is a zone Z31, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z31.
  • an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A24 and A25 intersect is defined as a zone Z32, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z32.
  • an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A26 and A27 intersect is defined as a zone Z33, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z33.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state of the state information corresponding to the three state output units G1 provided corresponding to each area Z31 to Z33.
  • the state output unit G1 in which the state information is in the permitted state is represented by a solid line vector B1 with a “ ⁇ ” mark
  • the state output unit G1 in which the state information is in the unauthorized state is indicated by “X”. It is indicated by a dotted vector B1 with.
  • each of the four moving bodies 10A to 10D is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
  • one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is set as the priority moving body, and the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the path of the priority moving body is preferentially permitted.
  • control is performed to secure the route of the priority moving body. That is, the state control unit 53 preferentially permits the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the path of the priority mobile body, which is one of the plurality of mobile bodies 10. Execute.
  • the four mobile units 10A to 10D the case where the mobile unit 10A traveling in the main area A21 is the “priority mobile unit” is illustrated.
  • the state control unit 53 gives priority to the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the route of the moving body 10A as the preferential moving body, that is, the state output unit G1 on the main area A21.
  • the state output unit G1 on the main line area A21 is preferentially set to the permitted state with respect to the state output unit G1 that controls entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27.
  • the state control unit 53 sets all of the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 that controls the entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 to the non-permitted state,
  • the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the A21 is set as the permitted state.
  • all the state output parts G1 on the main line area A21 are in the permitted state, and all the state output parts G1 on the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are in the non-permitted state.
  • the moving body 10A stops because all the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the course of the moving body 10A as the priority moving body are permitted states. You can pass through the main line area A21 without any.
  • all the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 that controls entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are non-permitted states, in the moving bodies 10B to 10D other than the priority moving body Is restricted from entering the main line area A21 from a plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27.
  • the passage of the moving body 10A as the preferential moving body is not limited to the moving body 10B other than the preferential moving body. Priority is given to 10D traffic.
  • the moving body 10A traveling in the main area A21 can preferentially pass through the main area A21.
  • the priority control like the cooperative control, it is preferable that the priority control is started in response to a request (priority request) from the priority mobile unit.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for a priority moving body when the priority control is executed. That is, in the example of FIG. 19, a penalty occurs for the moving body 10A as the priority moving body.
  • the state output unit G1 is operated unfairly in order to preferentially move the priority mobile unit, which may lead to an opportunity loss of the mobile units 10 other than the priority mobile unit. .. Therefore, in order to prevent the mobile unit 10 from silently using priority control as the priority mobile unit, it is preferable to impose a penalty on the mobile unit 10 to be the priority mobile unit.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 may generate an incentive as a consideration for the mobile bodies 10 other than the priority moving body when the priority control is executed. That is, in the example of FIG. 19, incentives may be generated as compensation for the mobile units 10B to 10D. Further, the penalty generated as a consideration for the priority moving body and the incentive generated as a consideration for the moving body 10 other than the priority moving body may be balanced with each other. This makes it possible to cancel out the penalties and incentives that accompany one priority control.
  • the consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration for each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 according to the status information compliance status. That is, a consideration is generated depending on whether or not the moving body 10 operates according to the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1. As an example, when the moving body 10 does not stop before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided even though the state information of the state output unit G1 is the non-permitted state, On the other hand, it is subject to a penalty as consideration. That is, since the moving body 10 that violates the instruction of the state output unit G1 has a high risk of collision with other moving bodies 10, it is preferable to impose a penalty in order to promote the correction.
  • an incentive may be generated as compensation for the mobile body 10 that continues to comply with the instruction of the state output unit G1 for a certain period. That is, it is preferable to pay an incentive to the excellent moving body 10 that complies with the state information so as to serve as a sample of another moving body 10.
  • the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of mobile units 10 in exchange for entering the specific section A31 (see FIG. 20).
  • the predetermined area A1 includes a specific section A31.
  • the predetermined area A1 includes a normal section A32 and a branch line area A33 in addition to the specific section A31.
  • the specific section A31 and the normal section A32 are both areas that serve as passages for the moving body 10 to pass through, and in the example of FIG. 20, they are linear areas extending in the left-right direction.
  • the branch line area A33 is an area that serves as a passage for the moving body 10 to pass through, and is connected to the normal section A32.
  • the branch line area A33 is a linear area extending in the vertical direction.
  • the area where the normal section A32 and the branch line area A33 intersect is a zone Z21, and two state output parts G21 and G22 are provided in the zone Z21.
  • the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state of the state information output by the two state output units G21 and G22 provided corresponding to the area Z21, respectively.
  • one moving body 10A exists in the specific section A31, and one moving body 10B exists in the normal section A32.
  • each of the two moving bodies 10A and 10B is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
  • the specific section A31 is an area where the state output units G21 and G22 do not exist. Therefore, the moving body 10A can pass through the specific section A31 without stopping.
  • Such a specific section A31 corresponds to an expressway (or a motorway). As a result, the moving body 10A passing through the specific section A31 can reach the destination earlier than the moving body 10B traveling in the normal section A32.
  • the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 in exchange for energy supply.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for the moving body 10 that replenishes energy.
  • the mobile body 10 includes a storage battery and operates by using the electric energy stored in the storage battery. Therefore, the energy supplied to the moving body 10 is electric energy. That is, charging the storage battery corresponds to supplying energy.
  • the moving body 10 can charge the storage battery at any time in the charging space set in the predetermined area A1. However, in order to prevent the moving body 10 from charging the charging space indiscriminately, it is preferable that a penalty is imposed on the moving body 10 that replenishes energy in exchange for the replenishment of energy.
  • the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 according to the transported object 40. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 has the transfer function of transferring the transfer target object 40. Specifically, the consideration generation unit 55 generates an incentive or a penalty as consideration according to the size, weight, and the like of the object to be transported 40. In short, the magnitude of the load applied to the moving body 10 to be transported differs depending on the object to be transported 40, and in some cases, it may lead to opportunity loss of the moving body 10. As an example, a penalty is charged as a consideration for the moving body 10 that carries the carrying object 40 that is a lightweight object, and an incentive is paid as a consideration for the moving body 10 that carries the carrying object 40 that is a heavy object.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an operation for generating the above-mentioned consideration.
  • the control system 50 first acquires operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of mobile bodies 10 in a predetermined area A1 by the acquisition unit 54 (S31). Then, the control system 50 determines whether or not the penalty condition is satisfied for any of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 by the consideration generating unit 55 based on the acquired operation information (S32).
  • Penalty conditions are conditions that must be met in order to be subject to a penalty as consideration. That is, the penalty condition includes, for example, the target moving body when the cooperative control is executed, the priority moving body when the priority control is executed, and the like.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 When the penalty condition is satisfied (S32: Yes), the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty (S33).
  • the control system 50 causes the consideration generation unit 55 to satisfy the incentive condition for any of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the acquired operation information. Is determined (S34).
  • the incentive conditions are the conditions that must be met in order to be eligible for incentives as consideration.
  • the incentive conditions include that the mobile body is a cooperative mobile body when the cooperative control is executed, and that it is not the priority mobile body when the priority control is executed.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 generates an incentive (S35).
  • the consideration generation unit 55 updates the consideration (S36) when a penalty is generated (S33) or an incentive is generated (S35). As a result, the penalty or incentive for the mobile unit 10 is reflected.
  • control system 50 ends the operation for generating the consideration.
  • the control system 50 repeatedly executes the processes S31 to S36.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 21 is merely an example of the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, and the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate.
  • the second embodiment is only one of various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the second embodiment can be variously modified according to the design and the like as long as the object of the present disclosure can be achieved.
  • the same function as the control system 50 may be embodied by a control method, a (computer) program, a non-transitory recording medium recording the program, or the like.
  • the control method according to one aspect is a control method for controlling a plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in a predetermined area A1, and is an acquisition process (corresponding to “S31” in FIG. 21) and a consideration generation process (FIG. 21). Corresponding to “S33” and “S35”).
  • the acquisition process is a process of acquiring motion information regarding the motion of the plurality of mobile units 10 in the predetermined area A1.
  • the consideration generating process is a process of generating a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the operation information obtained in the obtaining process.
  • a program according to one aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method.
  • the control system 50 in the present embodiment includes a computer system as in the first embodiment.
  • the computer system mainly comprises a processor as a hardware and a memory.
  • the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the function as the control system 50 in the present embodiment is realized.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. readable by the computer system. May be provided.
  • control system 50 it is not an essential configuration of the control system 50 that a plurality of functions in the control system 50 are integrated in one housing, and the constituent elements of the control system 50 are distributed and provided in the plurality of housings. May be.
  • the lower system 21A may be separate from the mobile unit 10.
  • at least a part of the function of the control system 50 for example, a part of the function of the state control unit 53 may be realized by a cloud (cloud computing) or the like.
  • the cooperative control the case where the cooperative moving body is moved is illustrated, but the cooperative control is not limited to such control.
  • the course of the target moving body may be secured by stopping the cooperative moving body on the shoulder of the road.
  • the control system 50A according to the present embodiment is different from the control system 50 according to the second embodiment in that it does not include the state control unit 53 (see FIG. 15).
  • the same components as those in the second embodiment will be designated by the common reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
  • the traffic control module M1 (including the area Z1 and the state output unit G1) does not exist. Therefore, the state information acquisition unit 24 (see FIG. 15) does not exist in the lower system 21A.
  • control system 50A has the work generation unit 57 in the upper system 51A.
  • the work generation unit 57 generates work information regarding the content of the work to be executed by the moving body 10.
  • the upper system 51A determines whether or not to grant permission to the request (work request) output from the lower system 21A.
  • the lower system 21A causes the subordinate mobile unit 10 to perform the work corresponding to the request.
  • the work request is generated by the request generation unit 25.
  • the lower system 21A outputs a request corresponding to the "work" specified by this work information by outputting the request in a form corresponding to the work information generated by the higher system 51A. Further, the lower system 21A is configured to output the instruction information regarding the content of the work corresponding to the request when the permission is given to the request. Therefore, the mobile body 10 can execute the work corresponding to the request (work request) for which the permission is given by executing the "work" defined by the instruction information output from the lower system 21A.
  • control system 50A may be configured to be communicable with the command system 80.
  • the command system 80 is mainly composed of a computer system including a memory and a processor, like the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A.
  • the command system 80 outputs a work command to the control system 50A.
  • the control system 50A Upon receiving the work order from the command system 80, the control system 50A generates work information based on the work order. In the present embodiment, the control system 50A generates a plurality of work information for realizing one work command based on one work command.
  • the host system 51A when the host system 51A receives one work command, the host system 51A generates a plurality of work information related to the contents of the work.
  • a request (work request) can be output corresponding to the work specified by each of the plurality of work information.
  • the moving body 10 can execute all the work defined by the plurality of work information, and one work. The order is fulfilled.
  • the consideration generating unit 55 when the moving body 10 executes the work, the consideration generating unit 55 generates an incentive as a consideration for the executed work.
  • the lower system 21A or the mobile body 10 is given motivation to perform the work.
  • the lower system 21A is given permission for a request (work request), and when the subordinate mobile body 10 is caused to perform the work, information about the incentive obtained by this work, or It may have a function of holding the "number of work points" which is the actual work record.
  • the size of the incentives is preferably determined for each work.
  • the “magnitude of incentive” in the present disclosure means the amount of consideration paid as an incentive.For example, if the incentive is money, the amount of money (amount) increases as the magnitude of the incentive increases. Get higher That is, it is possible not to generate a uniform incentive for all work but to make the size of the incentive different depending on the work.
  • the priority of the work is reflected in the size of the incentive.
  • the size of the incentive is determined by the priority of each work.
  • the higher the priority the greater the incentive.
  • the size of the incentive may be, instead of or together with the priority of the work, for example, a “work burden” that is a burden of performing the work. May be reflected.
  • the "work load” referred to in the present disclosure includes at least one of the type of work, the capacity required to execute the work (loading weight, etc.), the time required to execute the work (required time), and the like. As an example, regarding the required time, the longer the required time, the greater the work burden and the greater the incentive.
  • the absence of the traffic control module M1 (including the area Z1 and the state output unit G1) is not an essential configuration for the control system 50A according to the third embodiment. Even if the traffic control module M1 is present, the control system 50A does not include the state control unit 53, and therefore does not have the function of executing the control (priority control or the like) of the state output unit G1 in the traffic control module M1.
  • the control system (50, 50A) controls the passage of the moving body (10) using the passage control module (M1).
  • the traffic control module (M1) includes an area (Z1) set as a part of a predetermined area (A1) on which the moving body (10) moves, and a state output unit (G1) provided corresponding to the area (Z1). And, including.
  • the state output unit (G1) is in a permitted state that allows the moving body (10) to pass in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or does not allow the moving body (10) to pass.
  • the status information indicating whether the status is permitted or not is output.
  • the first direction (D1) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1)
  • the second direction (D2) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the inside of the area (Z1). This is the direction to move to the outside.
  • control system (50, 50A) capable of realizing smooth passage of the moving body (10).
  • control system (50, 50A) in the first aspect, one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2) by the state output unit (G1), the state information Is output.
  • the passage of the moving body (10) can be controlled in one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2).
  • a plurality of passage control modules (M1) are provided corresponding to a plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1), respectively. Includes the state output unit (G1) of.
  • a state control unit (a state control unit that controls the state indicated by the state information to either a permitted state or a disallowed state). 53) is further provided.
  • the state control unit (53) can change the state determined by the state output unit (G1), smoother traffic can be realized.
  • the state control unit (53) includes a plurality of state output units (G1) included in one or more traffic control modules (M1). For each of them, it controls whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a non-permitted state.
  • smoother traffic can be realized by controlling the states determined by the plurality of state output units (G1) in conjunction with each other.
  • the traffic control module (M1) has a plurality of status outputs provided respectively corresponding to the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1). Includes part (G1).
  • the state control unit (53) controls the state indicated by the state information output by one of the plurality of state output units (G1) to the permitted state, the remaining state output unit (G1) remains.
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) is controlled to be an unauthorized state.
  • the state control unit (53) makes it possible to pass one of the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1), so that the passage of the plurality of passages can be arranged smoothly. Passing can be realized.
  • the traffic control module (M1) is provided with a plurality of status outputs provided respectively corresponding to the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1). Includes part (G1).
  • the state control unit (53) at a second time point after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the first time point when all the states indicated by the state information output by the plurality of state output sections (G1) are set to the non-permission state, The state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) to be switched among the plurality of state output units (G1) is controlled to be the permitted state.
  • all the states determined by the plurality of state output units (G1) are set to the non-permission state, and after the passage between the plurality of passages and the zone (Z1) is blocked, the state output unit to be switched ( Since G1) is controlled to the permitted state, smoother passage can be realized.
  • the state control unit (53) outputs a state according to the purpose for which the moving body (10) moves.
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the section (G1) is controlled.
  • the state determined by the state output unit (G1) can be controlled to either the permitted state or the unpermitted state according to the purpose of the moving body (10) to move.
  • a detection unit that detects whether or not a moving body (10) exists inside the area (Z1). (52) is further provided.
  • the state control unit (53) controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) according to the detection result of the detection unit (52).
  • the state control unit (53) controls the state determined by the state output unit (G1) based on the detection result of the detection unit (52). For example, when the moving body (10) exists inside the zone (Z1), the state determined by the state output unit (G1) is set to the non-permission state, so that another movement from the outside to the inside of the zone (Z1) is performed. It is possible to suppress the movement of the body (10) and realize smooth passage.
  • the moving body (10) is at a confirmation position before the position where the status output unit (G1) is provided. Based on the result of confirming the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1), the vehicle passes or stops.
  • the confirmation position changes according to the state of the moving body (10).
  • the confirmation position can be changed so that the moving body (10) can stop at the stop position.
  • a plurality of zones (Z1 are provided along a route along which the moving body (10) moves in the predetermined area (A1). ) Is provided.
  • the passage of the mobile body (10) can be smoothly controlled by providing the plurality of zones (Z1) along the route along which the mobile body (10) moves.
  • the control system (50, 50A) includes the acquisition section (54) and the consideration generation section (55) in the fourth aspect.
  • the acquisition unit (54) acquires operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of moving bodies (10) in the predetermined area (A1).
  • the consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies (10) based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit (54).
  • the control system (50, 50A) controls a plurality of moving bodies (10) that move within the predetermined area (A1).
  • a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
  • the state control unit (53) is a priority moving body (10) which is one of a plurality of moving bodies (10).
  • Priority control is executed in which the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) on the path of is preferentially permitted.
  • the consideration generation unit (55) generates a penalty as a consideration for the priority moving body (10) when the priority control is executed.
  • the priority mobile unit (10) when the priority control is performed in which inequality may occur between the priority mobile unit (10) and another mobile unit (10), the priority mobile unit (10) is charged a value. Inequalities in work efficiency between the body (10) and other moving bodies (10) are less likely to occur.
  • the consideration generating unit (55) determines whether or not the plurality of mobile bodies (10) comply with the status information. Generate compensation.
  • the predetermined area (A1) includes the specific section (A31).
  • the consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration for each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) in exchange for entry into the specific section (A31).
  • the consideration generating unit (55) supplies energy to each of the plurality of moving bodies (10). In exchange, you will be charged.
  • each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) has a transport function for transporting the transport object (40).
  • the consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration for each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) according to the object (40) to be conveyed.
  • inequalities between the plurality of moving bodies (10) due to the transfer target (40) are less likely to occur.
  • the control method includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process.
  • the first setting process is a process of setting the zone (Z1) in a part of the predetermined area (A1) in which the moving body (10) moves.
  • the second setting process is a process of providing the state output unit (G1) corresponding to the zone (Z1).
  • the state output unit (G1) is in a permission state permitting passage of the moving body (10) in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or the passage of the moving body (10). Outputs status information indicating whether or not the status is disallowed.
  • the first direction (D1) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1).
  • the second direction (D2) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the inside to the outside of the area (Z1).
  • the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) is controlled to a permitted state or a disallowed state.
  • the control method according to the nineteenth aspect further includes an acquisition process and a consideration generation process in the eighteenth aspect.
  • the acquisition process is a process for acquiring operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of moving bodies (10) in a predetermined area (A1).
  • the consideration generating process is a process of generating a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10) based on the operation information acquired in the acquisition process.
  • a plurality of moving bodies (10) moving in the predetermined area (A1) are controlled.
  • a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
  • the control system (50, 50A) further includes a coordination control section (56) in the twelfth aspect.
  • the cooperative control unit (56) sets one moving body (10) among the plurality of moving bodies (10) as the target moving body (10), and the target moving body (10) among the plurality of moving bodies (10). By controlling the cooperative mobile body (10) other than 10), the cooperative control for securing the course of the target mobile body (10) is executed.
  • the consideration generator (55) generates a consideration for at least one of the target moving body (10) and the cooperative moving body (10) when cooperative control is executed.
  • the consideration generating unit (55) penalizes the target moving body (10) as a consideration when the cooperative control is executed. To occur.
  • the consideration generating unit (55) pays for the cooperative mobile body (10) when the cooperative control is executed. As an incentive to generate.
  • the cooperative control unit (56) performs cooperative control in response to a request from the target mobile body (10). Execute.
  • the target moving body (10) determines the target. By issuing a request from the moving body (10), it becomes possible to execute cooperative control.
  • the cooperative control unit (56) uses the following mobile body (10) as the cooperative mobile body (10). .. That is, the cooperative control unit (56) cooperates only with the moving body (10) existing in the area related to the course of the target moving body (10) in the predetermined area (A1) among the plurality of moving bodies (10). Let it be a moving body (10).
  • the cooperative control unit (56) is a cooperative moving body (56) located on the path of the target moving body (10). By moving 10), the course of the target moving body (10) is secured.
  • the cooperative moving body (10) gives way to the target moving body (10), so that the course of the target moving body (10) is secured, and the target moving body (10) moves on the course. It will be possible.
  • the cooperative control unit (56) secures the course of the target moving body (10) and moves the target moving body (10). After completion, the cooperating mobile body (10) is moved to the position before the cooperative control.
  • the disadvantage of the cooperative moving body (10) due to the movement of the cooperative moving body (10) during the cooperative control is unlikely to occur.
  • the cooperative control unit (56) notifies the surroundings of the target moving body (10) during cooperative control.
  • the person around the target moving body (10) is urged to remove the obstacle. It is possible.
  • the control system (50, 50A) according to the twenty-eighth aspect is the control system (50, 50A) according to any one of the twentieth to twenty-seventh aspects, further including a state control section (53) for controlling the state indicated by the state information with respect to the state output section (G1).
  • Prepare The state output unit (G1) is provided corresponding to an area (Z1) set as a part of a predetermined area (A1).
  • the state output unit (G1) is in a permitted state permitting passage of each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or the passage is permitted.
  • the status information indicating whether or not the status is the unauthorized status is output.
  • the first direction (D1) is a direction in which each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1).
  • the second direction (D2) is a direction in which each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) moves from the inside to the outside of the area (Z1).
  • the program according to the twenty-ninth aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method according to the eighteenth aspect.
  • the program according to the thirtieth aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method according to the nineteenth aspect.
  • a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
  • the state of the moving body (10) includes at least one of the speed and the weight of the moving body (10).
  • the moving body (10) includes a carrying device that carries an object.
  • various configurations (including modifications) of the control system (50, 50A) record the control method, (computer) program, or program of the control system (50, 50A). It can be embodied in a non-transitory recording medium or the like.
  • the configurations according to the second to 17th, 20th to 28th, and 31st to 32nd aspects are not essential configurations for the control system (50, 50A) and can be omitted as appropriate.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
  • Control Of Position, Course, Altitude, Or Attitude Of Moving Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a control system and control method with which it is possible to realize smooth passage of a moving body. This control system controls the passage of a moving body (10) using a passage control module (M1) that includes a section (Z1) set in a part of a prescribed area (A1) in which the moving body (10) moves, and a state output unit (G1) provided corresponding to the section (Z1). The state output unit (G1) outputs state information indicating whether a permitted state is in effect in which the passage of the moving body (10) is permitted, or a not-permitted state is in effect in which the passage of the moving body (10) is not permitted, in a first direction and/or a second direction. The first direction is a direction in which the moving body (10) moves from outside the section (Z1) into the section (Z1), and the second direction is a direction in which the moving body (10) moves from inside the section (Z1) out of the section (Z1).

Description

制御システム、及び制御方法Control system and control method
 本開示は、制御システム、及び制御方法に関する。より詳細には、本開示は、所定エリア内を移動する移動体を制御するための制御システム、及び制御方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a control system and a control method. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to a control system and a control method for controlling a moving body that moves within a predetermined area.
 特許文献1には、複数の自動搬送機(移動体)と、自動搬送機と無線通信するサーバ装置とを備える、移動ロボット制御システム(制御システム)が記載されている。特許文献1において、サーバ装置は、地図情報並びに自動搬送機の経路情報及び搬送機情報を格納する記憶部と、地図情報に基づき自動搬送機の移動経路を探索する経路探索部と、経路情報に基づき自動搬送機に移動の指示を与える移動制御部とを有する。 Patent Document 1 describes a mobile robot control system (control system) including a plurality of automatic transporters (mobile bodies) and a server device that wirelessly communicates with the automatic transporters. In Patent Document 1, the server device includes a storage unit that stores map information, route information of an automatic carrier, and carrier information, a route search unit that searches a moving route of the automatic carrier based on the map information, and route information. Based on this, it has a movement control unit that gives a movement instruction to the automatic carrier.
 特許文献1では、移動制御部が、搬送機情報及び経路情報に基づき、複数の自動搬送機の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得ると判定する場合、経路探索部は、干渉を生じ得る自動搬送機のうち少なくとも1つに関する経路情報を、干渉を回避するように変更する。ここで、自動搬送機の台数が増えると、複数の自動搬送機の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得ると判定される事態が増加し、自動搬送機の円滑な通行が妨げられる可能性があった。 In Patent Document 1, when the movement control unit determines that the movements of the plurality of automatic carriers may interfere with each other based on the carrier information and the route information, the route search unit automatically detects the interference. Modify the route information for at least one of the carriers to avoid interference. Here, as the number of automatic carriers increases, the number of situations in which it is determined that the movements of the plurality of automatic carriers may interfere with each other increases, which may hinder the smooth passage of the automatic carriers. there were.
特開2017-134794号公報JP, 2017-134794, A
 本開示の目的は、移動体の円滑な通行を実現可能な制御システム、及び制御方法を提供することにある。 An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control system and a control method capable of realizing smooth passage of a moving body.
 本開示の一態様の制御システムは、通行制御モジュールを用いて移動体の通行を制御する。前記通行制御モジュールは、前記移動体が移動する所定エリアの一部に設定される区域と、状態出力部と、を含む。前記状態出力部は前記区域に対応して設けられる。前記状態出力部は、第1方向及び第2方向の少なくとも一方で、前記移動体の通行を許可する許可状態であるか前記移動体の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力する。前記第1方向は、前記移動体が前記区域の外部から内部に移動する方向であり、前記第2方向は、前記移動体が前記区域の内部から外部に移動する方向である。 The control system according to an aspect of the present disclosure controls the passage of a moving body using a passage control module. The traffic control module includes an area set in a part of a predetermined area in which the moving body moves and a status output unit. The status output unit is provided corresponding to the area. The state output unit is a state indicating whether it is a permitted state that allows the passage of the moving body or a disallowed state that disallows the passage of the moving body in at least one of the first direction and the second direction. Output information. The first direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area, and the second direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area.
 本開示の一態様の制御方法は、第1の設定処理と、第2の設定処理と、制御処理とを含む。前記第1の設定処理では、移動体が移動する所定エリアの一部に区域を設定する。前記第2の設定処理では、前記区域に対応して、第1方向及び第2方向の少なくとも一方で、前記移動体の通行を許可する許可状態であるか前記移動体の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部を設ける。前記第1方向は、前記移動体が前記区域の外部から内部に移動する方向であり、前記第2方向は、前記移動体が前記区域の内部から外部に移動する方向である。前記制御処理では、前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を前記許可状態又は前記不許可状態に制御する。 A control method according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process. In the first setting process, an area is set in a part of a predetermined area where the moving body moves. In the second setting process, the passage of the moving body is permitted or the passage of the moving body is not permitted in at least one of the first direction and the second direction corresponding to the area. A state output unit is provided for outputting state information indicating whether the state is a non-permitted state. The first direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area, and the second direction is the direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area. In the control process, the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit is controlled to the permitted state or the non-permitted state.
図1は、本開示の実施形態1に係る制御システムの制御対象である移動体が移動する所定エリアの一部を示す平面図である。FIG. 1 is a plan view showing a part of a predetermined area in which a moving body that is a control target of the control system according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure moves. 図2は、同上の制御システムの概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the same control system. 図3は、同上の制御システムが備える通行制御モジュールが所定エリアに設けられている状態を説明する説明図である。FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where a traffic control module included in the control system of the above is provided in a predetermined area. 図4は、同上の制御システムの動作を説明するフローチャートである。FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the same control system. 図5は、同上の制御システムの制御対象である移動体の動作を説明するフローチャートである。FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the moving body controlled by the control system of the same. 図6は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例1を示す説明図である。FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 1 of the traffic control by the control system of the above. 図7は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例2を示す説明図である。FIG. 7: is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 2 of traffic control by the control system same as the above. 図8は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例3を示す説明図である。FIG. 8: is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 3 of the traffic control by the control system same as the above. 図9は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例4を示す説明図である。FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 4 of traffic control by the same control system. 図10は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例5を示す説明図である。FIG. 10: is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 5 of traffic control by the control system same as the above. 図11は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例6を示す説明図である。FIG. 11: is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 6 of traffic control by the control system same as the above. 図12は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例7を示す説明図である。FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 7 of traffic control by the same control system. 図13は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例8を示す説明図である。FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 8 of traffic control by the same control system. 図14は、同上の制御システムによる通行制御の動作例9を示す説明図である。FIG. 14: is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 9 of the traffic control by the control system same as the above. 図15は、実施形態2に係る制御システムの概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system according to the second embodiment. 図16は、同上の制御システムの制御対象である移動体が移動する所定エリアの模式的な平面図である。FIG. 16 is a schematic plan view of a predetermined area in which a moving body, which is a control target of the control system, moves. 図17A、図17B、及び図17Cは、同上の制御システムによる協調制御の例を示す説明図である。17A, 17B, and 17C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of cooperative control by the control system of the above. 図18は、同上の制御システムによる協調制御の例を示す説明図である。FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cooperative control by the control system of the above. 図19は、同上の制御システムによる優先制御の例を示す説明図である。FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of priority control by the control system of the above. 図20は、同上の制御システムにおける特定区間の例を示す説明図である。FIG. 20: is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the specific area in the control system same as the above. 図21は、同上の制御システムの動作を説明するフローチャートである。FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the control system of the same. 図22は、実施形態3に係る制御システムの概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system according to the third embodiment.
 (実施形態1)
 (1.1)概要
 本実施形態に係る制御システム50は、図2に示すように、所定エリアA1(図1参照)内を移動する移動体10を制御するためのシステムである。図1及び図2では移動体10が1台しか図示されていないが、制御システム50は複数台の移動体10の通行を制御する。ここにおいて、制御システム50は、制御システム50の制御対象となる複数台の移動体10と共に移動体システム1を構成する。言い換えれば、本実施形態に係る移動体システム1は、制御システム50と、複数台の移動体10と、を備えている。
(Embodiment 1)
(1.1) Overview As shown in FIG. 2, the control system 50 according to the present embodiment is a system for controlling the moving body 10 that moves within a predetermined area A1 (see FIG. 1). Although only one mobile body 10 is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the control system 50 controls the passage of a plurality of mobile bodies 10. Here, the control system 50 configures the mobile body system 1 together with a plurality of mobile bodies 10 that are controlled by the control system 50. In other words, the mobile body system 1 according to the present embodiment includes the control system 50 and a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
 制御システム50は、所定エリアA1の一部に設けられる区域Z1(図1参照)と、区域Z1に対応して設けられる状態出力部G1と、を含む通行制御モジュールM1を用いて、移動体10の通行を制御する。状態出力部G1は、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2の少なくとも一方で、移動体10の通行を許可する許可状態であるか、移動体10の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力する。第1方向D1(以下、「入方向」と言う場合もある)は、移動体10が区域Z1の外部から内部に移動する方向である。第2方向D2(以下、「出方向」と言う場合もある)は、移動体10が区域Z1の内部から外部に移動する方向である。 The control system 50 uses the traffic control module M1 including a zone Z1 (see FIG. 1) provided in a part of the predetermined area A1 and a state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1 to move the moving body 10 Control the passage of traffic. Whether the state output unit G1 is in a permission state in which the passage of the moving body 10 is permitted in at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2, or is in a non-permission state in which the passage of the moving body 10 is not permitted. The status information indicating is output. The first direction D1 (hereinafter, also referred to as “incoming direction”) is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the outside to the inside of the zone Z1. The second direction D2 (hereinafter, also referred to as “outgoing direction”) is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the inside of the zone Z1 to the outside.
 本開示でいう「移動体」は、物体(荷物等)を搬送する搬送装置、無人搬送車(AGV:Automated Guided Vehicle)、移動ロボット、自律航行船及びドローン等を含む。本開示でいう「移動ロボット」は、例えば、車輪型、クローラ型又は脚型の(歩行型を含む)のロボットである。移動体10は、所定エリアA1内を移動するだけでなく、例えば、搬送、ピッキング、溶接、実装、陳列、接客、警備、組立及び検査等の様々な作業を実行する機能を有していてもよい。「所定エリア」A1は、複数台の移動体10が移動する範囲であって、一例として、工場、倉庫、建設現場、店舗、物流センタ、事務所、公園、住宅、学校、病院、駅、空港又は駐車場等である。さらに、例えば、船舶、電車又は飛行機の内部等、乗り物の内部に移動体10が配備されている場合には、乗り物の内部が所定エリアA1になる。 The term “moving body” as used in the present disclosure includes a carrier device for carrying an object (eg, luggage), an unmanned guided vehicle (AGV: Automated Guided Vehicle), a mobile robot, an autonomous navigation ship, a drone, and the like. The “mobile robot” in the present disclosure is, for example, a wheel-type, crawler-type, or leg-type (including walking type) robot. The moving body 10 not only moves within the predetermined area A1 but also has a function of performing various works such as transportation, picking, welding, mounting, display, customer service, security, assembly and inspection. Good. The "predetermined area" A1 is a range in which a plurality of moving bodies 10 move, and as an example, a factory, a warehouse, a construction site, a store, a distribution center, an office, a park, a house, a school, a hospital, a station, an airport. Or a parking lot or the like. Furthermore, for example, when the moving body 10 is installed inside a vehicle such as inside a ship, train or airplane, the inside of the vehicle becomes the predetermined area A1.
 「区域」Z1は、移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1内に設定される。区域Z1は、移動体10の少なくとも一部が入る大きさを有していればよく、複数台の移動体10が入る大きさを有していてもよい。また、図1に示す区域Z1は正方形の領域であるが、区域Z1の形状は正方形に限定されず、区域Z1の大きさ及び形状は適宜変更が可能である。図1では所定エリアA1内に1つの区域Z1が設けられているが、所定エリアA1内に複数の区域Z1が設けられてもよい。 The "area" Z1 is set in the predetermined area A1 where the moving body 10 moves. The zone Z1 only needs to have a size that can accommodate at least a part of the mobile body 10, and may have a size that can accommodate a plurality of mobile bodies 10. Further, although the area Z1 shown in FIG. 1 is a square area, the shape of the area Z1 is not limited to the square, and the size and shape of the area Z1 can be changed as appropriate. Although one section Z1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 in FIG. 1, a plurality of sections Z1 may be provided in the predetermined area A1.
 「状態出力部」G1は、区域Z1に対応して設けられる。状態出力部G1は、区域Z1の境界に設けられてもよいし、区域Z1の外側であって区域Z1に出入りする移動体10が通行する部分に設けられてもよい。本実施形態の状態出力部G1は、所定エリアA1のマップに関する地図情報において、区域Z1に対応する位置(例えば、マップ上の基準位置を基準とする二次元直交座標で示される位置)に仮想的に設けられる。状態出力部G1は、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2の少なくとも一方で、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するために設けられた仮想的な構成である。したがって、状態情報の「出力」は、状態出力部G1が出力処理のトリガとなって、制御システム50から移動体10へ状態情報を出力させること、つまり状態出力部G1が制御システム50から移動体10へ状態情報を間接的に出力させる態様を含み得る。 "The status output part" G1 is provided corresponding to the zone Z1. The state output unit G1 may be provided at the boundary of the area Z1, or may be provided at a portion outside the area Z1 through which the moving body 10 entering and exiting the area Z1 passes. In the map information about the map of the predetermined area A1, the state output unit G1 of the present embodiment virtually locates the position corresponding to the zone Z1 (for example, the position indicated by the two-dimensional orthogonal coordinates based on the reference position on the map). It is provided in. The state output unit G1 is a virtual configuration provided for outputting state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not, at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2. Therefore, the "output" of the state information means that the state output unit G1 triggers the output process to output the state information from the control system 50 to the moving body 10, that is, the state output unit G1 is the moving body from the control system 50. It may include a mode of indirectly outputting the state information to 10.
 以下の実施形態では、例えば、移動体10が区域Z1に設けられた状態出力部G1の位置に接近することを出力処理のトリガとして、制御システム50が移動体10へ状態情報を出力している。所定エリアA1内を移動する移動体10が、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置に近付くと、移動体10は、状態出力部G1への接近をトリガとして制御システム50から出力される状態情報を取得する。本実施形態では、状態出力部G1が、所定エリアA1のマップに関する地図情報において仮想的に設けられており、制御システム50が、状態出力部G1の状態情報を保持しているので、移動体10は、制御システム50が保持している状態出力部G1の状態情報を制御システム50から取得する。 In the following embodiment, for example, the control system 50 outputs the state information to the moving body 10 by triggering the output processing when the moving body 10 approaches the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the area Z1. .. When the moving body 10 moving in the predetermined area A1 approaches the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, the moving body 10 acquires the state information output from the control system 50 triggered by the approach to the state output unit G1. To do. In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 is virtually provided in the map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, and the control system 50 holds the state information of the state output unit G1. Acquires from the control system 50 the state information of the state output unit G1 held by the control system 50.
 状態出力部G1は仮想的な構成(つまり実体を伴わない構成)に限定されず、実空間において、所定エリアA1に設けられる区域Z1の周辺に設置される信号機のような実体を伴う構成でもよい。状態出力部G1が実体を伴う構成であれば、状態出力部G1が、当該状態出力部G1に接近してくる移動体10に対して状態情報を直接出力してもよく、移動体10は状態出力部G1から状態情報を直接取得する。 The state output unit G1 is not limited to a virtual configuration (that is, a configuration without an entity), and may be a configuration with an entity such as a traffic light installed around an area Z1 provided in a predetermined area A1 in a real space. .. If the state output unit G1 is a configuration accompanied by a substance, the state output unit G1 may directly output the state information to the moving body 10 approaching the state output unit G1. The state information is directly acquired from the output unit G1.
 したがって、状態情報の出力は、状態出力部G1が移動体10に状態情報を直接出力する態様と、状態情報を間接的に出力する態様とを含み得る。 Therefore, the output of the state information may include a mode in which the state output unit G1 directly outputs the state information to the moving body 10 and a mode in which the state information is indirectly output.
 移動体10は、状態出力部G1から直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報に基づいて、状態情報が許可状態を示していれば、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置を通過する。また、移動体10は、状態出力部G1から直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報に基づいて、状態情報が不許可状態を示していれば、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置又はその手前で停止する。このように、本実施形態の制御システム50では、状態出力部G1から直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報に基づいて移動体10の通行を制御することができる。したがって、本実施形態の制御システム50では、所定エリアA1内の所望の位置に通行制御モジュールM1を(仮想的に)配置することで、状態出力部G1から直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報に基づいて移動体10の通行を制御することができる。よって、移動体10の台数が増えた場合でも、移動体10の円滑な通行を実現可能な制御システム50を提供することができる。 The mobile body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided if the state information indicates a permitted state based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1. Further, if the state information indicates a disallowed state based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1, the moving body 10 is at or in front of the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. Stop. As described above, in the control system 50 of the present embodiment, the passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled based on the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1. Therefore, in the control system 50 of the present embodiment, the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1 by (virtually) arranging the traffic control module M1 at a desired position in the predetermined area A1. The movement of the moving body 10 can be controlled based on the above. Therefore, it is possible to provide the control system 50 capable of realizing smooth passage of the mobile bodies 10 even when the number of the mobile bodies 10 increases.
 (1.2)詳細
 以下、本実施形態に係る制御システム50及び移動体システム1の構成について、図1~図3を参照して、詳細に説明する。以下に示す、数値、形状、材料、構成要素の位置、複数の構成要素間の位置関係及び接続関係等は、一例であって、本開示を限定する主旨ではない。また、以下で参照する図面は、いずれも模式的な図であり、図中の各構成要素の大きさ及び厚さそれぞれの比が、必ずしも実際の寸法比を反映しているとは限らない。
(1.2) Details Hereinafter, the configurations of the control system 50 and the mobile system 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. Numerical values, shapes, materials, positions of constituent elements, positional relations between plural constituent elements, connection relations, and the like shown below are examples, and are not intended to limit the present disclosure. Further, the drawings referred to below are all schematic views, and the ratio of the size and the thickness of each component in the drawing does not necessarily reflect the actual dimensional ratio.
 以下では、制御システム50の制御対象、つまり移動体システム1に含まれる移動体10が、搬送対象物40(図2参照)を搬送する搬送機能を有することと仮定する。本実施形態では、移動体10は、所定エリアA1内での搬送対象物40の搬送の作業に特化した専用の作業装置、つまり搬送装置であって、特に、無人搬送車である。移動体10としての無人搬送車は、所定エリアA1内を移動しつつ、搬送対象物40の搬送という作業を実行する。本実施形態では、移動体10は、例えば、工場内で部品を搬送する作業を実行しており、搬送対象物40は、一例として、部品等の荷物が載せられるパレット(図1参照)である。本実施形態で例示する移動体10の構成について詳しくは、「(1.2.4)移動体」の欄で説明する。 In the following, it is assumed that the control target of the control system 50, that is, the mobile object 10 included in the mobile object system 1 has a transfer function of transferring the transfer target object 40 (see FIG. 2 ). In the present embodiment, the moving body 10 is a dedicated work device, that is, a transfer device, which is specialized for the work of transporting the transport object 40 in the predetermined area A1, and is particularly an automatic guided vehicle. The automatic guided vehicle as the moving body 10 performs a work of carrying the object 40 to be carried while moving in the predetermined area A1. In the present embodiment, for example, the moving body 10 executes a work of transporting parts in a factory, and the transport object 40 is, for example, a pallet (see FIG. 1) on which luggage such as parts is placed. .. The details of the configuration of the moving body 10 exemplified in this embodiment will be described in the section “(1.2.4) Moving body”.
 (1.2.1)全体構成
 移動体システム1は、図1及び図2に示すように、制御システム50と、1台以上の移動体10と、を備えている。本実施形態では、移動体システム1は、複数台の移動体10を備えている。
(1.2.1) Overall Configuration As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the moving body system 1 includes a control system 50 and one or more moving bodies 10. In this embodiment, the mobile body system 1 includes a plurality of mobile bodies 10.
 (1.2.2)通行制御モジュール
 通行制御モジュールM1は、上述のように、所定エリアA1の一部に設けられる区域Z1と、区域Z1に対応して設けられる状態出力部G1とを含む。
(1.2.2) Traffic Control Module The traffic control module M1 includes the zone Z1 provided in a part of the predetermined area A1 and the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1, as described above.
 通行制御モジュールM1は、所定エリアA1内の任意の一部に設けることができる。例えば、移動体10の使用者等が所定エリアA1において移動体10が移動する移動経路を設計する際に、所定エリアA1のマップ上の所望の場所に1又は複数の通行制御モジュールM1が仮想的に設けられる。ここで、通行制御モジュールM1は、複数の移動経路が交差するエリア、複数の移動体10が交互に通行するエリア、及び移動体10が渋滞するエリア等、移動体10の通行を制御したいエリアに設けられるのが好ましい。 The traffic control module M1 can be provided in any part of the predetermined area A1. For example, when the user or the like of the moving body 10 designs a moving route along which the moving body 10 moves in the predetermined area A1, one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 are virtually arranged at desired locations on the map of the predetermined area A1. It is provided in. Here, the traffic control module M1 sets an area in which the movement of the moving body 10 is desired to be controlled, such as an area where a plurality of moving routes intersect, an area where a plurality of moving bodies 10 pass alternately, and an area where the moving body 10 is congested. It is preferably provided.
 図1は、所定エリアA1において移動体10が移動する通路100の途中に設けられた通行制御モジュールM1を示す。図1の例では、通路100の一部に、通行制御モジュールM1の区域Z1が設けられている。区域Z1は、1台の移動体10が入る大きさの矩形の領域である。区域Z1が、移動体10の全体が入る大きさを有していることは必須ではなく、移動体10の少なくとも一部が入る大きさを有していればよい。また、区域Z1の形状は矩形に限定されず、区域Z1の形状は適宜変更が可能である。また、通路100の幅は、少なくとも1台の移動体10が通行可能な幅よりも広ければよく、複数台の移動体10がすれ違い可能なだけの幅を有していてもよい。 FIG. 1 shows a traffic control module M1 provided in the middle of a passage 100 in which a moving body 10 moves in a predetermined area A1. In the example of FIG. 1, a section Z1 of the traffic control module M1 is provided in a part of the passage 100. The zone Z1 is a rectangular area that is large enough to accommodate one moving body 10. It is not essential that the area Z1 has a size that can accommodate the entire moving body 10, and it is sufficient that the area Z1 has a size that can accommodate at least a part of the moving body 10. The shape of the zone Z1 is not limited to a rectangle, and the shape of the zone Z1 can be changed as appropriate. Further, the width of the passage 100 may be wider than the width that at least one moving body 10 can pass through, and may have a width that allows a plurality of moving bodies 10 to pass each other.
 状態出力部G1は、区域Z1に対応して設けられている。図1の例では、通路100において、区域Z1に出入りする移動体10が通過する位置に状態出力部G1が設けられている。状態出力部G1は、第1方向D1(入方向)と第2方向D2(出方向)との少なくとも一方で、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するために区域Z1に対応して設けられる。本実施形態では、状態出力部G1によって、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2のうちの一方(例えば第1方向D1)で、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報が出力される。したがって、状態出力部G1から直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報では、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2のうちの他方(例えば第2方向D2)では移動体10の通行は制限されない。すなわち、状態出力部G1は、移動体10の通行を許可するか又は禁止するかを示す情報(状態情報)を表示(出力)する信号機の機能を有している。換言すれば、状態出力部G1は、不許可状態において、移動体10の通行を阻止するように、区域Z1に対応する位置に表れる仮想的なゲートの機能を有している。本実施形態では、状態出力部G1は、第1方向D1と第2方向D2との一方のみで、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力している。例えば、第1方向D1のみで許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力可能なように状態出力部G1は設けられている。したがって、第2方向D2においても移動体10の通行を制御したい場合には、第2方向D2において許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部が更に設けられればよい。つまり、区域Z1に対応して、第1方向D1において許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部G1と、第2方向D2において許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部とが設けられていればよい。 The state output unit G1 is provided corresponding to the zone Z1. In the example of FIG. 1, in the passage 100, the state output unit G1 is provided at a position where the moving body 10 moving in and out of the zone Z1 passes. The state output unit G1 outputs the state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in at least one of the first direction D1 (incoming direction) and the second direction D2 (outgoing direction). It is provided corresponding to Z1. In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 outputs state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 (for example, the first direction D1). To be done. Therefore, the state information directly or indirectly output from the state output unit G1 does not limit the passage of the moving body 10 in the other of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 (for example, the second direction D2). That is, the state output unit G1 has a function of a traffic light that displays (outputs) information (state information) indicating whether to allow or prohibit the passage of the moving body 10. In other words, the state output unit G1 has a function of a virtual gate appearing at a position corresponding to the area Z1 so as to block the passage of the moving body 10 in the unauthorized state. In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 outputs state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not, only in one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2. For example, the state output unit G1 is provided so that state information indicating whether the state is permitted or not permitted can be output only in the first direction D1. Therefore, when it is desired to control the passage of the moving body 10 also in the second direction D2, the state output unit for outputting the state information indicating whether the state is the permitted state or the non-permitted state in the second direction D2 is further provided. It should be provided. That is, the state output unit G1 for outputting the state information indicating whether the state is the permission state or the non-permission state in the first direction D1 corresponding to the zone Z1 and whether the state is the permission state in the second direction D2. It suffices if a state output unit for outputting state information indicating whether the state is the non-permitted state is provided.
 本実施形態では、所定エリアA1において状態出力部G1が設けられる位置、及び、状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態(許可状態又は不許可状態)を示す状態情報は、制御システム50によって保持されている。また、所定エリアA1内を移動する複数の移動体10の各々は、所定エリアA1において通行制御モジュールM1が設けられている位置(つまり、所定エリアA1のマップ上での区域Z1及び状態出力部G1の位置)の情報を保持している。また、移動体10は、所定エリアA1内で移動体10が存在する現在位置を検知する機能を有する。移動体10は、所定エリアA1内を区域Z1に向かって移動する場合に状態出力部G1が設けられる位置に近付くと、状態出力部G1に割り当てられた状態情報の出力を制御システム50に要求する。ここで、移動体10が制御システム50から取得した状態出力部G1の状態情報が許可状態であれば、移動体10は、状態出力部G1が設けられている位置を通過して区域Z1に移動する。一方、移動体10が制御システム50から取得した状態出力部G1の状態情報が不許可状態であれば、移動体10は、状態出力部G1が設けられている位置又はその手前で停止する。 In the present embodiment, the control system 50 holds the position where the state output unit G1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 and the state information indicating the state (permitted state or disallowed state) set for the state output unit G1. Has been done. Further, each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in the predetermined area A1 is located at the position where the traffic control module M1 is provided in the predetermined area A1 (that is, the zone Z1 and the state output unit G1 on the map of the predetermined area A1). (Position) information is held. The moving body 10 also has a function of detecting the current position of the moving body 10 within the predetermined area A1. When the moving body 10 approaches the position where the state output part G1 is provided when moving in the predetermined area A1 toward the zone Z1, the moving body 10 requests the control system 50 to output the state information assigned to the state output part G1. .. Here, if the state information of the state output unit G1 acquired by the moving body 10 from the control system 50 is in the permitted state, the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and moves to the area Z1. To do. On the other hand, if the state information of the state output unit G1 acquired from the control system 50 by the moving body 10 is in an unauthorized state, the moving body 10 stops at the position where the state output unit G1 is provided or in front of the position.
 本実施形態では、状態出力部G1は、例えば、所定エリアA1を上から見た仮想平面VA1(図3参照)において、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置に対応して、通路100を横切るように設けられたベクトルB1として表現される。したがって、移動体10は、状態出力部G1に関する情報として、ベクトルB1の始点の座標と、ベクトルB1の終点の座標とを有している。ここで、ベクトルB1の向きは、移動体10の通行を制御する方向(第1方向D1又は第2方向D2)に応じた向きとなる。例えば、図3に示すように、移動体10の通行を制御する方向が第1方向D1(図3において右側から左側へ進む方向)であれば、ベクトルB1は、当該ベクトルB1と移動体10の速度を表すベクトルC1との外積(B1×C1)が正となるような向き(図3において実線の矢印で示す向き)となる。ここで、ベクトルの外積の向きが上向きである場合を正とする。ベクトルB1の向きが図3において実線の矢印で示す向きと逆向きであれば、ベクトルB1とベクトルC1との外積(B1×C1)は負になるので、第1方向D1に移動する移動体10の通行は通行制御モジュールM1によって制御されない。 In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 crosses the passage 100, for example, in a virtual plane VA1 (see FIG. 3) when the predetermined area A1 is viewed from above, corresponding to the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. It is expressed as the provided vector B1. Therefore, the moving body 10 has the coordinates of the starting point of the vector B1 and the coordinates of the ending point of the vector B1 as information about the state output unit G1. Here, the direction of the vector B1 is a direction corresponding to the direction (first direction D1 or second direction D2) for controlling the passage of the moving body 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, if the direction in which the movement of the moving body 10 is controlled is the first direction D1 (the direction from the right side to the left side in FIG. 3), the vector B1 is the same as the vector B1 and the moving body 10. The direction is such that the outer product (B1 × C1) with the vector C1 representing the velocity is positive (the direction indicated by the solid arrow in FIG. 3). Here, the case where the direction of the cross product of the vectors is upward is positive. If the direction of the vector B1 is opposite to the direction shown by the solid line arrow in FIG. 3, the outer product (B1×C1) of the vector B1 and the vector C1 becomes negative, and thus the moving body 10 moving in the first direction D1. Is not controlled by the traffic control module M1.
 本実施形態では、制御システム50が、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報を許可状態とするか不許可状態とするかを制御しており、状態情報が示す状態は他の移動体10の通行状態等に応じて適宜変更される。 In the present embodiment, the control system 50 controls whether the state information output by the state output unit G1 is allowed or disallowed, and the state indicated by the state information is that of the other mobile body 10. It will be changed as appropriate according to the traffic conditions.
 一方、制御システム50の制御対象である移動体10は、移動体10の現在位置の情報と、移動体10の速度を表すベクトルC1の情報と、を保持している。ベクトルC1の始点は、例えば移動体10の基準位置(例えば移動体10が回転する場合の回転中心となる位置)であり、ベクトルC1の方向は移動体10の移動方向に、ベクトルC1の大きさは移動体10の移動速度にそれぞれ対応している。ここで、移動体10は、移動体10の現在位置及び現在の移動速度に応じて、ベクトルC1の情報を逐次更新している。また、移動体10は、所定エリアA1に設けられた1又は複数の通行制御モジュールM1の情報を保持しており、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置に関する位置情報(すなわち、ベクトルB1の始点及び終点の座標に関する情報)を保持している。 On the other hand, the moving body 10 which is the control target of the control system 50 holds the information of the current position of the moving body 10 and the information of the vector C1 representing the speed of the moving body 10. The starting point of the vector C1 is, for example, the reference position of the moving body 10 (for example, the position that is the center of rotation when the moving body 10 rotates), and the direction of the vector C1 is the moving direction of the moving body 10 and the size of the vector C1. Corresponds to the moving speed of the moving body 10. Here, the moving body 10 sequentially updates the information of the vector C1 according to the current position and the current moving speed of the moving body 10. Further, the moving body 10 holds the information of one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and the position information regarding the position where the state output unit G1 is provided (that is, the start point and the end point of the vector B1). Information about the coordinates of) is held.
 移動体10は、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置に関する位置情報とベクトルC1の情報とに基づいて、ベクトルC1がベクトルB1と交差する位置まで移動したか否かを判断する。移動体10は、ベクトルC1がベクトルB1と交差する位置まで移動すると、ベクトルB1とベクトルC1との外積(B1×C1)を求め、外積(B1×C1)の符号が正であれば、状態出力部G1に対して設定された状態情報の送信を制御システム50に要求する。移動体10は、制御システム50から取得した状態情報が許可状態であれば、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置を通過し、状態情報が不許可状態であれば、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置又はその手前で停止する。また、移動体10は、外積(B1×C1)の符号が負であれば、通行制御モジュールM1によって通行が制限されていないと判断し、状態出力部G1が設けられる位置をそのまま通過する。また、図3では、状態情報が示す状態が許可状態である状態出力部G1を、「〇印」を付した実線のベクトルB1で表記し、状態情報が示す状態が不許可状態である状態出力部G1を、「×印」を付した点線のベクトルB1で表記する。 The moving body 10 determines whether or not the vector C1 has moved to a position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 based on the position information regarding the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and the information of the vector C1. When the moving body 10 moves to a position where the vector C1 intersects with the vector B1, the moving body 10 obtains an outer product (B1×C1) between the vector B1 and the vector C1, and if the sign of the outer product (B1×C1) is positive, the status output The control system 50 is requested to transmit the status information set for the section G1. If the state information acquired from the control system 50 is in the permitted state, the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, and if the state information is not permitted, the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. Or stop before that. Further, if the sign of the outer product (B1 × C1) is negative, the moving body 10 determines that the passage is not restricted by the passage control module M1 and passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided as it is. Further, in FIG. 3, the state output unit G1 in which the state indicated by the state information is the permitted state is represented by the solid line vector B1 marked with “◯”, and the state indicated by the state information is the disallowed state output. The portion G1 is represented by a dotted line vector B1 marked with "x".
 このように、所定エリアA1内を区域Z1に向かって移動する移動体10が、状態出力部G1が設けられている位置に近付くと、移動体10は、状態出力部G1への接近をトリガにして、制御システム50から状態出力部G1の状態情報を取得する。そして、移動体10は、状態出力部G1の状態情報に基づいて、状態情報が示す状態が許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを判定する。状態情報が許可状態を示していれば、移動体10は状態出力部G1が設けられる位置を通過して区域Z1に入る。状態情報が不許可状態を示していれば、移動体10は状態出力部G1が設けられる位置又はその手前で停止する。 In this way, when the moving body 10 moving in the predetermined area A1 toward the zone Z1 approaches the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, the moving body 10 is triggered by the approach to the state output unit G1. Then, the state information of the state output unit G1 is acquired from the control system 50. Then, the moving body 10 determines whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a disallowed state based on the state information of the state output unit G1. If the state information indicates the permitted state, the moving body 10 passes through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided and enters the zone Z1. If the state information indicates the disapproval state, the moving body 10 stops at or before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided.
 ここで、ベクトルC1がベクトルB1と交差する位置が、移動体10が状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態情報を確認する確認位置となる。移動体10の状態によってベクトルC1の方向及び大きさが変化するので、ベクトルC1がベクトルB1と交差する位置(つまり確認位置)が変化する。移動体10の状態は、移動体10の移動方向、移動速度、及び移動体10の重量(搬送物も含む)等を含む。そして、移動体10は、状態出力部G1の手前の確認位置で状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を確認した結果に基づいて通行又は停止するので、状態情報が不許可状態を示している場合には移動体10を状態出力部G1の手前の安全な位置(確認位置)で停止させることができる。 Here, the position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 is the confirmation position where the moving body 10 confirms the state information set for the state output unit G1. Since the direction and size of the vector C1 change depending on the state of the moving body 10, the position where the vector C1 intersects the vector B1 (that is, the confirmation position) changes. The state of the moving body 10 includes the moving direction of the moving body 10, the moving speed, the weight of the moving body 10 (including the transported object), and the like. Then, the moving body 10 passes or stops based on the result of confirming the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 at the confirmation position in front of the state output unit G1, so that the state information indicates the non-permission state. In the case shown, the moving body 10 can be stopped at a safe position (confirmation position) before the status output unit G1.
 本実施形態の制御システム50は、所定エリアA1のマップ上で所望の場所に通行制御モジュールM1を設けることで、移動体10の通行を制御することができる。したがって、所定エリアA1内で移動体10が移動する移動経路を設計する際に、所定エリアA1内の1又は複数の場所に通行制御モジュールM1を設けることで、所定エリアA1内で移動体10が円滑に通行できるように、移動体10の通行を制御することができる。 The control system 50 of the present embodiment can control the passage of the moving body 10 by providing the passage control module M1 at a desired location on the map of the predetermined area A1. Therefore, when designing the movement route in which the moving body 10 moves within the predetermined area A1, by providing the traffic control module M1 at one or a plurality of places within the predetermined area A1, the moving body 10 moves within the predetermined area A1. The passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled so that the vehicle can pass smoothly.
 (1.2.3)制御システム
 本実施形態の制御システム50は、例えばサーバ装置で実現されており、図2に示すように、制御部51と、通信部61と、記憶部62とを備える。
(1.2.3) Control System The control system 50 of the present embodiment is realized by, for example, a server device, and includes a control unit 51, a communication unit 61, and a storage unit 62, as shown in FIG. ..
 通信部61は、複数台の移動体10の各々と通信可能に構成されている。ここにおいて「通信可能」とは、有線通信又は無線通信の適宜の通信方式により、直接的、又はネットワークNT1若しくは中継器70等を介して間接的に、情報を授受できることを意味する。すなわち、制御システム50と複数の移動体10の各々とは、互いに情報を授受することができる。また、制御システム50と、移動体10とは、互いに双方向に通信可能である。そのため、制御システム50から移動体10への情報の送信、更には、移動体10から制御システム50への情報の送信の両方が可能である。本実施形態では、複数の移動体10の各々は、所定エリアA1に配置される複数の中継器70のいずれかと、電波を媒体とする無線通信によって通信を行う。そのため、制御システム50と複数の移動体10とは、少なくともネットワークNT1及び中継器70を介して、間接的に通信を行うことになる。 The communication unit 61 is configured to be able to communicate with each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10. Here, "communicable" means that information can be exchanged directly or indirectly via a network NT1 or a repeater 70 or the like by an appropriate communication method of wired communication or wireless communication. That is, the control system 50 and each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 can exchange information with each other. Further, the control system 50 and the moving body 10 can communicate with each other bidirectionally. Therefore, both transmission of information from the control system 50 to the mobile body 10 and further transmission of information from the mobile body 10 to the control system 50 are possible. In the present embodiment, each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 communicates with any of the plurality of repeaters 70 arranged in the predetermined area A1 by wireless communication using radio waves as a medium. Therefore, the control system 50 and the plurality of mobile bodies 10 indirectly communicate with each other via at least the network NT1 and the relay 70.
 要するに、各中継器70は、各移動体10と制御システム50との間の通信を中継する機器(アクセスポイント)である。中継器70は、ネットワークNT1を介して、制御システム50の通信部61と通信する。本実施形態では一例として、中継器70と移動体10との間の通信には、Wi-Fi(登録商標)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、ZigBee(登録商標)又は免許を必要としない小電力無線(特定小電力無線)等の規格に準拠した、無線通信を採用する。また、ネットワークNT1は、インターネットに限らず、例えば、所定エリアA1内又は所定エリアA1の運営会社内のローカルな通信ネットワークが適用されてもよい。 In short, each relay device 70 is a device (access point) that relays communication between each mobile body 10 and the control system 50. The repeater 70 communicates with the communication unit 61 of the control system 50 via the network NT1. In this embodiment, as an example, communication between the repeater 70 and the mobile body 10 does not require Wi-Fi (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), ZigBee (registered trademark), or a low-power radio that does not require a license. Adopt wireless communication that complies with standards such as (specified low power wireless). Further, the network NT1 is not limited to the Internet, and for example, a local communication network within the predetermined area A1 or the operating company of the predetermined area A1 may be applied.
 記憶部62は、例えば、書換可能な不揮発性の半導体メモリ等の非一時的記録媒体にて実現される。記憶部62は、例えば、所定エリアA1のマップに関する地図情報と、所定エリアA1内に設けられる区域Z1の位置に関する情報、区域Z1に対応して設けられる状態出力部G1の位置に関する位置情報、及び状態出力部G1に対して設定した状態情報、等を記憶する。本実施形態では、所定エリアA1に設けられる区域Z1に対応して状態出力部G1が設けられており、状態出力部G1は実体を有しない。そのため、制御システム50は、通行制御モジュールM1に関する情報を記憶部62に記憶することによって、所定エリアA1内に仮想的に設けられた通行制御モジュールM1をデータとして備えている。 The storage unit 62 is realized by a non-transitory recording medium such as a rewritable nonvolatile semiconductor memory. The storage unit 62 includes, for example, map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, information regarding the position of the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, position information regarding the position of the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the zone Z1, and The state information and the like set for the state output unit G1 are stored. In the present embodiment, the state output unit G1 is provided corresponding to the area Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and the state output unit G1 has no substance. Therefore, the control system 50 stores, as data, the traffic control module M1 virtually provided in the predetermined area A1 by storing information about the traffic control module M1 in the storage unit 62.
 制御部51は、例えば、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。すなわち、コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムを、プロセッサが実行することにより、制御部51の機能(例えば、検知部52及び状態制御部53等の機能)が実現される。プログラムはメモリに予め記録されていてもよいし、インターネット等の電気通信回線を通して提供されてもよく、メモリカード等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。 The control unit 51 mainly has, for example, a computer system including a memory and a processor. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the control unit 51 (for example, the functions of the detection unit 52 and the state control unit 53) are realized. The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
 検知部52は、移動体10から通信部61が受信した移動体10の現在位置を示す現在位置情報と、記憶部62が記憶する区域Z1の情報とに基づいて、区域Z1に移動体10が存在するか否かを検知する。検知部52は、区域Z1に移動体10が存在する場合、区域Z1内に存在する移動体10の数をさらに検知してもよい。 Based on the current position information indicating the current position of the mobile unit 10 received by the communication unit 61 from the mobile unit 10 and the information on the zone Z1 stored in the storage unit 62, the detection unit 52 detects that the mobile unit 10 is in the zone Z1. It detects whether or not it exists. When the moving body 10 exists in the zone Z1, the detection unit 52 may further detect the number of moving bodies 10 in the zone Z1.
 状態制御部53は、所定エリアA1に設けられる1又は複数の通行制御モジュールM1について、通行制御モジュールM1の状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態と不許可状態とのいずれかに制御する。状態制御部53は、例えば、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G1によって直接又は間接的に出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態と不許可状態とのいずれかに制御する。状態制御部53が、状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御すると、移動体10は、状態情報が示す状態に基づいて、所定エリアA1において状態出力部G1が設けられた位置を通過できる。また、状態制御部53が、状態制御部53が出力する状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御すると、移動体10は、状態情報が示す状態に基づいて、所定エリアA1において状態出力部G1が設けられた位置又はその手前で停止する。このように、状態制御部53が、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態と不許可状態とのいずれかに制御することで、通行制御モジュールM1により移動体10の通行を許可するか不許可とするかを変更することができる。 The state control unit 53 sets the states indicated by the state information set to the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 for one or a plurality of traffic control modules M1 provided in the predetermined area A1 into a permitted state and a non-permitted state. To control either. The state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information directly or indirectly output by the state output unit G1 to be either a permitted state or a disallowed state, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, for example. .. When the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to the permitted state, the moving body 10 is provided with the state output unit G1 in the predetermined area A1 based on the state indicated by the state information. Can pass through the position. Further, when the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state control unit 53 to the non-permission state, the moving body 10 causes the state output unit G1 in the predetermined area A1 based on the state indicated by the state information. Stops at or before the position where is provided. In this way, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to be either the permitted state or the non-permitted state, so that the passage control module M1 allows the passage of the moving body 10. Can be changed to allow or disallow.
 本実施形態では、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G1を表すベクトルB1の向きを変えることで、状態出力部G1によって許可状態又は不許可状態に決定される方向を、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2のうちのいずれかに設定できる。したがって、制御システム50は、通行制御モジュールM1を用いて所望の方向において移動体10の通行を制御することができる。本実施形態の制御システム50は、状態出力部G1を用いることにより、間接的に移動体10を制御する。すなわち、状態制御部53は、状態情報が示す状態を制御することによって、状態出力部G1から出力される状態情報に従って制御される移動体10を、間欠的に制御することができる。  In the present embodiment, the state control unit 53 changes the direction of the vector B1 representing the state output unit G1 to set the directions determined by the state output unit G1 to the permitted state or the disallowed state in the first direction D1 and the first direction D1. It can be set to either of the two directions D2. Therefore, the control system 50 can control the passage of the moving body 10 in a desired direction by using the passage control module M1. The control system 50 of the present embodiment indirectly controls the moving body 10 by using the state output unit G1. That is, the state control unit 53 can intermittently control the moving body 10 controlled according to the state information output from the state output unit G1 by controlling the state indicated by the state information. ‥
 (1.2.4)移動体
 次に、本実施形態で例示する移動体10の構成についてより詳細に説明する。
(1.2.4) Moving Body Next, the configuration of the moving body 10 exemplified in this embodiment will be described in more detail.
 移動体10は、所定エリアA1内でパレット40を運搬するための無人搬送車であり、パレット40を積載して目的地まで自律走行する。本実施形態では、制御システム50が、ネットワークNT1及び中継器70を介して移動体10と通信し、移動体10の移動を制御する。 The moving body 10 is an automatic guided vehicle for transporting the pallet 40 within the predetermined area A1, and the pallet 40 is loaded and autonomously travels to the destination. In the present embodiment, the control system 50 communicates with the mobile unit 10 via the network NT1 and the relay 70 to control the movement of the mobile unit 10.
 移動体10は、図1及び図3に示すように、例えば、所定エリアA1の床面等からなる平坦な移動面110を自律走行する。ここでは一例として、移動体10は、蓄電池を備え、蓄電池に蓄積された電気エネルギを用いて動作することとする。本実施形態では、移動体10は、パレット40を積載した状態で移動面110上を走行する。これにより、移動体10は、例えば、所定エリアA1において、ある場所に置かれているパレット40を、別の場所に搬送することが可能である。 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the moving body 10 autonomously travels on a flat moving surface 110 composed of, for example, the floor surface of a predetermined area A1. Here, as an example, the moving body 10 includes a storage battery and operates using the electric energy stored in the storage battery. In this embodiment, the moving body 10 travels on the moving surface 110 with the pallets 40 loaded. Thereby, the moving body 10 can transport the pallet 40 placed at one place to another place in the predetermined area A1, for example.
 移動体10は、本体部11を備えている。本体部11は直方体状に形成されている。本実施形態では、本体部11の下部から、2本のフォーク12が後方に向かって突出しており、2本のフォーク12でパレット40をすくい上げることで、フォーク12の上にパレット40を積載する。また、移動体10は、2本のフォーク12の前側を持ち上げながら、前進することで、フォーク12からパレット40を降ろすことができる。 The moving body 10 includes a main body 11. The main body 11 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape. In the present embodiment, the two forks 12 project rearward from the lower portion of the main body 11, and the pallets 40 are stacked on the forks 12 by scooping up the pallets 40 with the two forks 12. Further, the moving body 10 can move down the pallet 40 from the forks 12 by moving forward while lifting the front sides of the two forks 12.
 移動体10は、本体部11及び2本のフォーク12の下部に複数(例えば4つ)の車輪を有している。4つの車輪のうち、少なくとも本体部11の下部に設けられた2つの車輪は駆動輪であり、これら駆動輪が個別に駆動されることにより、移動体10が移動面110に沿って所望の方向に移動可能となる。ここで、複数の車輪のうちの駆動輪は、例えば、オムニホイール等の全方向移動型車輪であってもよい。 The moving body 10 has a plurality of (for example, four) wheels below the main body 11 and the two forks 12. Of the four wheels, at least two wheels provided at the bottom of the main body 11 are drive wheels, and the drive wheels are individually driven so that the moving body 10 moves in a desired direction along the moving surface 110. Can be moved to. Here, the drive wheels of the plurality of wheels may be omnidirectional wheels such as omni wheels, for example.
 移動体10は、図2に示すように、制御部21と、通信部31と、位置検知部33と、走行装置34と、記憶部32とを備える。移動体10の制御部21、通信部31、位置検知部33、走行装置34、及び記憶部32は本体部11に搭載されている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the moving body 10 includes a control unit 21, a communication unit 31, a position detection unit 33, a traveling device 34, and a storage unit 32. The control unit 21, the communication unit 31, the position detection unit 33, the traveling device 34, and the storage unit 32 of the moving body 10 are mounted on the main body unit 11.
 通信部31は、中継器70及びネットワークNT1を介して制御システム50(制御システム50の通信部61)と通信する。ここで、通信部31は中継器70との間で無線通信方式により通信を行う。 The communication unit 31 communicates with the control system 50 (the communication unit 61 of the control system 50) via the relay 70 and the network NT1. Here, the communication unit 31 communicates with the repeater 70 by a wireless communication method.
 記憶部32は、例えば、書換可能な不揮発性の半導体メモリ等の非一時的記録媒体にて実現される。記憶部32は、例えば、所定エリアA1のマップに関する地図情報、所定エリアA1内に設けられる区域Z1の位置に関する情報、及び、所定エリアA1内に設けられる状態出力部G1の位置に関する位置情報等の情報を記憶する。 The storage unit 32 is realized by a non-transitory recording medium such as a rewritable nonvolatile semiconductor memory. The storage unit 32 stores, for example, map information regarding the map of the predetermined area A1, information regarding the position of the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1, and position information regarding the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1. Store information.
 位置検知部33は、所定エリアA1内で移動体10が存在する現在位置に関する現在位置情報を検知する。位置検知部33は、例えば、複数の発信器から電波で送信されるビーコン信号を受信する受信機を含む。複数の発信器は、移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1内の複数箇所に配置されている。位置検知部33は、複数の発信器の位置と、受信機でのビーコン信号の受信電波強度とに基づいて、移動体10の現在位置を測定する。位置検知部は、GPS(Global Positioning System)等の衛星測位システムを用いて実現されてもよい。移動体10は、位置検知部33の検知結果を通信部31から制御システム50へ所定の送信時間間隔(例えば1秒間隔)で定期的に送信する。移動体10は、制御システム50からの送信要求等に応じて、位置検知部33の検知結果を通信部31から制御システム50へ不定期に送信してもよい。 The position detection unit 33 detects the current position information regarding the current position of the moving body 10 within the predetermined area A1. The position detection unit 33 includes, for example, a receiver that receives beacon signals transmitted by radio waves from a plurality of transmitters. The plurality of transmitters are arranged at a plurality of locations within the predetermined area A1 in which the moving body 10 moves. The position detection unit 33 measures the current position of the mobile body 10 based on the positions of the plurality of transmitters and the received radio wave intensity of the beacon signal at the receiver. The position detection unit may be realized by using a satellite positioning system such as GPS (Global Positioning System). The mobile unit 10 periodically transmits the detection result of the position detection unit 33 from the communication unit 31 to the control system 50 at predetermined transmission time intervals (for example, one second intervals). The mobile body 10 may irregularly transmit the detection result of the position detection unit 33 from the communication unit 31 to the control system 50 in response to a transmission request or the like from the control system 50.
 走行装置34は、制御部21からの制御命令を受けて、本体部11に備えられた複数の駆動輪を駆動することで、移動体10を所望の方向に走行させる。 The traveling device 34 receives a control command from the control unit 21 and drives a plurality of driving wheels provided in the main body portion 11 to drive the moving body 10 in a desired direction.
 制御部21は、例えば、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。すなわち、コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムを、プロセッサが実行することにより、制御部21の機能(例えば、経路取得部22、状態情報取得部24及び走行制御部23等の機能)が実現される。プログラムはメモリに予め記録されていてもよいし、インターネット等の電気通信回線を通して提供されてもよく、メモリカード等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。 The control unit 21 mainly has, for example, a computer system including a memory and a processor. That is, the functions of the control unit 21 (for example, the functions of the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, the travel control unit 23, etc.) are realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system. It The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
 経路取得部22は、制御システム50から通信部31を介して、移動体10の移動経路に関する経路情報を取得する。経路取得部22は、制御システム50から通信部31を介して、移動体10が実行する作業の内容に関する作業情報を取得し、この作業情報に基づいて移動体10の移動経路を決定することで経路情報を取得してもよい。例えば、第1エリア201(図6参照)にいる移動体10が第1エリア201から第3エリア203に荷物を運ぶという作業情報を取得すると、この移動体10の経路取得部22は、この作業情報に基づいて経路情報を取得する。すなわち、経路取得部22は、作業情報に基づいて、第1エリア201内で荷物を載せる位置から、通路エリア204を通って、第3エリア203内で荷物を降ろす位置まで移動体10が移動する移動経路を取得する。 The route acquisition unit 22 acquires route information regarding the movement route of the mobile body 10 from the control system 50 via the communication unit 31. The route acquisition unit 22 acquires work information regarding the content of the work executed by the mobile body 10 from the control system 50 via the communication unit 31, and determines the movement route of the mobile body 10 based on the work information. The route information may be acquired. For example, when the work information that the moving body 10 in the first area 201 (see FIG. 6) carries a load from the first area 201 to the third area 203 is acquired, the route acquisition unit 22 of the moving body 10 performs this work. Acquire route information based on the information. That is, the route acquisition unit 22 moves the moving body 10 from the position where the luggage is loaded in the first area 201 to the position where the luggage is unloaded in the third area 203 through the aisle area 204 based on the work information. Get the travel route.
 状態情報取得部24は、移動体10が所定エリアA1内に設けられた状態出力部G1の位置に移動すると、状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報を取得する。制御部21は、状態情報取得部24が取得した状態出力部G1の状態情報に基づいて、この状態情報が示す状態が許可状態か不許可状態かを判断し、判断結果に応じて状態出力部G1が設けられた場所を通過するか停止するかを決定する。 The state information acquisition unit 24 acquires the state information output by the state output unit G1 when the moving body 10 moves to the position of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1. The control unit 21 determines whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a disallowed state based on the state information of the state output unit G1 acquired by the state information acquisition unit 24, and the state output unit according to the determination result. Determine whether to pass or stop where G1 is located.
 走行制御部23は、走行装置34を制御し、移動体10を所望の方向に走行(移動)させる。走行制御部23は、例えば、経路取得部22が取得した経路情報に従って移動体10を走行させる。 The traveling control unit 23 controls the traveling device 34 to cause the moving body 10 to travel (move) in a desired direction. The traveling control unit 23 causes the moving body 10 to travel according to the route information acquired by the route acquisition unit 22, for example.
 (1.3)動作
 以下、本実施形態に係る制御システム50及び制御システム50の制御対象である移動体10の動作について図4~図14を参照して、詳細に説明する。
(1.3) Operation Hereinafter, the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment and the moving body 10 that is a control target of the control system 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 to 14.
 (1.3.1)制御システムの動作
 制御システム50が所定エリアA1内に設けられた状態出力部G1の状態情報を更新し、移動体10からの要求に応じて状態情報を送信する一連の処理について図4のフローチャートを参照して説明する。
(13.1) Operation of control system A series of series in which the control system 50 updates the state information of the state output unit G1 provided in the predetermined area A1 and transmits the state information in response to a request from the mobile body 10. The process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
 制御システム50の制御部51は、移動体10から定期的(例えば1秒ごと)に送信される現在位置情報を通信部61が受信すると(S1:Yes)、移動体10の現在位置情報を更新し、記憶部62に記憶する。このとき、検知部52は、通信部61が受信した現在位置情報に基づいて所定エリアA1内に設けられた区域Z1における移動体10の存否を検知する検知処理を行う(S2)。区域Z1内に移動体10が存在する場合、検知部52は、複数の移動体10から送信される現在位置情報に基づいて、1つの区域Z1内に存在する移動体10の台数を更に検知してもよい。 The control unit 51 of the control system 50 updates the current position information of the mobile unit 10 when the communication unit 61 receives the current position information transmitted from the mobile unit 10 periodically (for example, every one second) (S1: Yes). Then, it is stored in the storage unit 62. At this time, the detection unit 52 performs a detection process for detecting the presence or absence of the moving body 10 in the area Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1 based on the current position information received by the communication unit 61 (S2). When the moving body 10 exists in the area Z1, the detection unit 52 further detects the number of moving bodies 10 existing in one area Z1 based on the current position information transmitted from the plurality of moving bodies 10. May be.
 検知部52により区域Z1における移動体10の存否が検知されると、状態制御部53が検知部52による検知結果等に基づいて区域Z1に対応して設けられた状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報を許可状態又は不許可状態に設定する(S3)。例えば、区域Z1に移動体10が存在する場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態とし、区域Z1内への移動体10の移動を禁止する。また、区域Z1に移動体10が存在しない場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態とし、区域Z1内への移動体10の移動を許可する。そして、状態制御部53は、S3の処理で設定した状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報を記憶部62に記憶する。 When the detection unit 52 detects the presence or absence of the moving body 10 in the area Z1, the state control unit 53 corresponds to the state output unit G1 provided corresponding to the area Z1 based on the detection result by the detection unit 52 or the like. The information is set to the permitted state or the disallowed state (S3). For example, when the moving body 10 exists in the area Z1, the state control unit 53 disallows the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G1 and moves the moving body 10 into the area Z1. Prohibit Further, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the area Z1, the state control unit 53 permits the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G1 and moves the moving body 10 into the area Z1. To give permission. Then, the state control unit 53 stores in the storage unit 62 the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1 set in the process of S3.
 その後、通信部61がいずれかの移動体10から状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報の出力を要求する要求信号を受信すると(S4:Yes)、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G1に対応して設定される状態情報を通信部61から要求元の移動体10に送信させて(S5)、処理を終了する。 After that, when the communication unit 61 receives a request signal requesting the output of the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1 from any of the mobile bodies 10 (S4: Yes), the state control unit 53 corresponds to the state output unit G1. Then, the communication unit 61 transmits the set status information to the requesting mobile unit 10 (S5), and the process ends.
 制御システム50の制御部51は、以上のような処理を定期的に実行し、状態出力部G1の状態情報を更新するとともに、移動体10から状態情報の要求を受けると要求元の移動体10に状態出力部G1に対応して設定された状態情報を送信する。 The control unit 51 of the control system 50 periodically executes the above-described processing to update the state information of the state output unit G1 and, when receiving the request for the state information from the mobile unit 10, the requesting mobile unit 10 Then, the status information set corresponding to the status output unit G1 is transmitted.
 区域Z1が所定の制限台数まで移動体10を収容可能な場合、S3の処理において、状態制御部53は、区域Z1内に存在する移動体10の台数が所定の制限台数未満であれば、状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報が示す状態を許可状態としてもよい。これにより、制御システム50は、区域Z1内に存在する移動体10の台数が制限台数に達するまでは、区域Z1内への移動体10の移動を許可するように移動体10の通行を制御することができる。 When the area Z1 can accommodate the moving bodies 10 up to a predetermined limit number, in the process of S3, the state control unit 53 states if the number of the moving bodies 10 existing in the area Z1 is less than the predetermined limit number. The state indicated by the state information corresponding to the output unit G1 may be the permitted state. As a result, the control system 50 controls the passage of the moving body 10 so as to allow the moving body 10 to move into the area Z1 until the number of the moving bodies 10 existing in the area Z1 reaches the limit number. be able to.
 図4に示すフローチャートは、本実施形態に係る制御システム50の動作の一例に過ぎず、処理の順序が適宜変更されてもよいし、処理が適宜追加又は省略されてもよい。 The flowchart shown in FIG. 4 is merely an example of the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, and the order of processing may be changed as appropriate, or the processing may be appropriately added or omitted.
 (1.3.2)移動体の動作
 移動体10の走行制御部23が、経路取得部22が取得した経路情報に従って移動体10を走行させている場合の移動体10の動作を図5のフローチャートを参照して説明する。
(1.3.2) Operation of the moving body The operation of the moving body 10 when the traveling control unit 23 of the moving body 10 is traveling the moving body 10 according to the route information acquired by the route acquisition unit 22 is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to the flowchart.
 移動体10の位置検知部33は、所定エリアA1内において移動体10が存在する現在位置を逐次更新しており、制御部21は、位置検知部33が検知した現在位置情報を通信部31から制御システム50に送信させる(S11)。 The position detection unit 33 of the moving body 10 sequentially updates the current position where the moving body 10 exists in the predetermined area A1, and the control unit 21 transmits the current position information detected by the position detecting unit 33 from the communication unit 31. The control system 50 is made to transmit (S11).
 位置検知部33が現在位置情報を更新すると、制御部21は、現在位置情報及び記憶部32が記憶する状態出力部G1の位置情報等に基づいて、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置に接近したか否かを判断する(S12)。ここで、移動体10の移動速度及び移動方向を表すベクトルC1が、状態出力部G1を表すベクトルB1に交差すれば、制御部21は、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置に接近したと判定する。 When the position detection unit 33 updates the current position information, the control unit 21 approaches the position where the state output unit G1 is provided based on the current position information and the position information of the state output unit G1 stored in the storage unit 32. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S12). Here, if the vector C1 representing the moving speed and the moving direction of the moving body 10 intersects the vector B1 representing the state output unit G1, the control unit 21 determines that the position where the state output unit G1 is provided is approached. To do.
 S12の判断で、制御部21が、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置に接近していないと判断すれば(S12:No)、S11の処理に戻ってS11以降の処理を実行する。 If it is determined in S12 that the control unit 21 has not approached the position where the state output unit G1 is provided (S12: No), the process returns to S11 and the processes from S11 are executed.
 S12の判断で、制御部21が、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置に接近したと判断すると(S12:Yes)、制御部21は、状態出力部G1の状態情報を要求する要求信号を通信部31から制御システム50に送信させる(S13)。 If the control unit 21 determines that the position where the state output unit G1 is provided is approached in the determination of S12 (S12: Yes), the control unit 21 communicates a request signal requesting the state information of the state output unit G1. The control unit 50 is transmitted from the unit 31 (S13).
 その後、制御システム50から送信された状態情報を通信部31が受信すると(S14)、状態情報取得部24は、通信部31を介して状態情報を取得し、制御部21が状態情報に基づいて状態出力部G1が設けられた位置を通行するか停止するかを決定する。すなわち、処理S14で受信した状態情報が許可状態であれば(S15:Yes)、制御部21は、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置を通過するように移動体10を制御する。一方、処理S14で受信した状態情報が不許可状態であれば(S15:No)、制御部21は、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置の手前で停止するように移動体10を制御する。制御部21は、要求信号を送信したにもかかわらず、制御システム50から状態情報を受信できなかった場合、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置で停止するのが好ましく、移動体10の安全な通行を実現できる。 After that, when the communication unit 31 receives the state information transmitted from the control system 50 (S14), the state information acquisition unit 24 acquires the state information via the communication unit 31, and the control unit 21 based on the state information. It is determined whether to pass or stop the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. That is, if the state information received in the process S14 is the permitted state (S15: Yes), the control unit 21 controls the moving body 10 so as to pass through the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. On the other hand, if the state information received in the process S14 is an unauthorized state (S15: No), the control unit 21 controls the moving body 10 so as to stop before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided. When the control unit 21 cannot receive the state information from the control system 50 even though the request signal is transmitted, it is preferable that the control unit 21 stops at the position where the state output unit G1 is provided, and the moving body 10 is safe. Passing can be realized.
 このように、移動体10の制御部21は、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態が許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかに応じて、状態出力部G1が設けられた位置を通過するか停止するかを決定する。制御システム50は、通行制御モジュールM1を用い、当該通行制御モジュールM1の状態出力部G1に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態とするか不許可状態とするかを制御(設定)することで、移動体10の通行を制御することができる。よって、制御システム50は、通行制御モジュールM1を用いて、移動体10の円滑な通行を実現することができる。 As described above, the control unit 21 of the moving body 10 is provided with the state output unit G1 depending on whether the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 is a permitted state or a disallowed state. Decide whether to pass or stop the position. The control system 50 uses the traffic control module M1 to control (setting) whether the status indicated by the status information set for the status output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 is a permitted status or a disallowed status. By doing so, the passage of the moving body 10 can be controlled. Therefore, the control system 50 can realize smooth passage of the moving body 10 by using the passage control module M1.
 図5に示すフローチャートは、移動体10の動作の一例に過ぎず、処理の順序が適宜変更されてもよいし、処理が適宜追加又は省略されてもよい。 The flowchart shown in FIG. 5 is merely an example of the operation of the moving body 10, and the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate.
 (1.3.3)制御システムによる移動体の通行制御
 次に、所定エリアA1内で通行制御モジュールM1が設けられた場所を移動体10が通行する場合の動作について図6~図14を参照して詳細に説明する。
(1.3.3) Traffic control of the moving body by the control system Next, see FIGS. 6 to 14 for the operation when the moving body 10 passes through the place where the traffic control module M1 is provided in the predetermined area A1. And will be described in detail.
 (1.3.3.1)動作例1
 図6に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例1を説明する。
(1.3.3.1) Operation example 1
An operation example 1 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 6.
 図6は、複数台の移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の模式的な平面図である。本実施形態では、所定エリアA1が、工場内の第1エリア201と第2エリア202と第3エリア203と通路エリア204とを含んでいる。ここで、第1エリア201は第1部品が製造されるエリアであり、第2エリア202は第2部品が製造されるエリアである。第3エリア203は、第1エリア201で製造された第1部品と、第2エリア202で製造された第2部品とが組み立てられるエリアである。通路エリア204は、第1エリア201と第2エリア202と第3エリア203との間をつなぐ通路となるエリアである。移動体10は、例えば、第1エリア201又は第2エリア202から通路エリア204を通って第3エリア203へ移動する。また、移動体10は、例えば、第3エリア203から通路エリア204を通って第1エリア201又は第2エリア202に移動する。ここで、制御システム50は、通路エリア204において移動体10のすれ違い通行が起きないように、通路エリア204での移動体10の通行を制御する。つまり、制御システム50は、通路エリア204内での移動体10の通行を、第1エリア201又は第2エリア202から通路エリア204に向かう方向と、第3エリア203から第1エリア201又は第2エリア202に向かう方向とで交互に切り替えている。 FIG. 6 is a schematic plan view of a predetermined area A1 in which a plurality of moving bodies 10 move. In the present embodiment, the predetermined area A1 includes the first area 201, the second area 202, the third area 203, and the passage area 204 in the factory. Here, the first area 201 is an area where the first component is manufactured, and the second area 202 is an area where the second component is manufactured. The third area 203 is an area in which the first part manufactured in the first area 201 and the second part manufactured in the second area 202 are assembled. The passage area 204 is an area that serves as a passage that connects the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203. The moving body 10 moves from the first area 201 or the second area 202 to the third area 203 through the passage area 204, for example. Further, the moving body 10 moves from the third area 203 to the first area 201 or the second area 202 through the passage area 204, for example. Here, the control system 50 controls the passage of the moving body 10 in the passage area 204 so that the moving body 10 does not pass each other in the passage area 204. That is, the control system 50 makes the passage of the moving body 10 in the passage area 204 in the direction from the first area 201 or the second area 202 to the passage area 204, and from the third area 203 to the first area 201 or the second. It is switched alternately in the direction toward the area 202.
 動作例1では、制御システム50が、所定エリアA1内の通路エリア204を区域Z11として設定しており、この区域Z11に対応して3つの状態出力部G11,G12,G13が設定されている。動作例1では、区域Z11と、区域Z11に対応して設けられた状態出力部G11,G12,G13とを含む通行制御モジュールM11が設けられている。ここで、状態出力部G11は、第1エリア201と区域Z11とをつなぐ出入口211付近に設けられる。状態出力部G12は、第2エリア202と区域Z11とをつなぐ出入口212付近に設けられる。また、状態出力部G13は、第3エリア203と区域Z11とをつなぐ出入口213付近に設けられる。 In the operation example 1, the control system 50 sets the passage area 204 in the predetermined area A1 as the zone Z11, and three state output units G11, G12, G13 are set corresponding to the zone Z11. In the operation example 1, the traffic control module M11 including the area Z11 and the state output units G11, G12, and G13 provided corresponding to the area Z11 is provided. Here, the state output unit G11 is provided near the entrance 211 that connects the first area 201 and the zone Z11. The state output unit G12 is provided near the doorway 212 that connects the second area 202 and the zone Z11. The state output unit G13 is provided near the doorway 213 that connects the third area 203 and the zone Z11.
 制御システム50の検知部52は、区域Z11に移動体10が存在するか否かを検知しており、状態制御部53は、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G11,G12,G13に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を制御する。例えば、状態制御部53は、区域Z11に移動体10が存在しない場合、第1状態と第2状態とを所定の周期で交互に繰り返す。第1状態は、状態出力部G11,G12に対して設定される状態情報を許可状態を示す情報とし、かつ、状態出力部G13に対して設定される状態情報を不許可状態を示す情報とする状態である。第2状態は、状態出力部G11,G12に対して設定される状態情報を不許可状態を示す情報とし、かつ、状態出力部G13に対して設定される状態情報を許可状態を示す情報とする状態である。 The detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in the area Z11, and the state control unit 53 detects the state output units G11, G12, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52. The state indicated by the state information set for G13 is controlled. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the zone Z11, the state control unit 53 alternately repeats the first state and the second state with a predetermined cycle. In the first state, the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 is information indicating a permission state, and the state information set for the state output unit G13 is information indicating a non-permission state. It is in a state. In the second state, the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 is information indicating a non-permitted state, and the state information set for the state output unit G13 is information indicating a permitted state. It is in a state.
 ここで、第1状態では、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に入ることができ、第3エリア203に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に入ることができない。したがって、第1状態は、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202から通路エリア204に入った移動体10が、通路エリア204を通って第3エリア203に移動可能な状態である。第1状態において、第1エリア201又は第2エリア202に存在する1又は複数の移動体10が通路エリア204(区域Z11)に入り、制御システム50の検知部52が区域Z11に移動体10が存在することを検知すると、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G11~G13によって出力される状態情報を第1状態で保持する。これにより、第3エリア203内に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に移動することはできず、第1エリア201又は第2エリア202から通路エリア204に入った1又は複数の移動体10が通路エリア204へと移動する一方通行の移動のみが可能になる。その後、通路エリア204内に存在する1又は複数の移動体10が全て第3エリア203に移動し、通路エリア204内に移動体10が存在しない状態になると、状態制御部53は、第1状態と第2状態とを所定の周期で交互に繰り返すように、状態出力部G11~G13によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御(設定)する。 Here, in the first state, the moving body 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 can enter the passage area 204, and the moving body 10 existing in the third area 203 can enter the passage area 204. I can't. Therefore, the first state is a state in which the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the first area 201 and the second area 202 can move to the third area 203 through the passage area 204. In the first state, one or more moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 or the second area 202 enter the passage area 204 (zone Z11), and the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 moves the moving body 10 to the zone Z11. When detecting the presence, the state control unit 53 holds the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 in the first state. As a result, the moving body 10 existing in the third area 203 cannot move to the passage area 204, and one or more moving bodies 10 entering the passage area 204 from the first area 201 or the second area 202 Only one-way movement to the aisle area 204 is possible. After that, when one or a plurality of moving bodies 10 existing in the passage area 204 all move to the third area 203 and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204, the state control unit 53 is in the first state. The state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 is controlled (set) so that the above and the second state are alternately repeated at a predetermined cycle.
 一方、第2状態では、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に入ることができず、第3エリア203に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に入ることができる。したがって、第2状態は、第3エリア203から通路エリア204に入った移動体10が、通路エリア204を通って第1エリア201又は第2エリア202に移動可能な状態となる。第2状態において、第3エリア203に存在する1又は複数の移動体10が通路エリア204(区域Z11)に入り、制御システム50の検知部52が区域Z11に移動体10が存在することを検知すると、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G11~G13によって出力される状態情報を第2状態で保持する。これにより、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202に存在する移動体10は通路エリア204に移動することはできず、第3エリア203から通路エリア204に入った1又は複数の移動体10が通路エリア204へと移動する一方通行の移動のみが可能になる。その後、通路エリア204内に存在する1又は複数の移動体10が全て第1エリア201又は第2エリア202に移動し、通路エリア204内に移動体10が存在しない状態になると、状態制御部53は、第1状態と第2状態とを所定の周期で交互に繰り返すように、状態出力部G11~G13によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御(設定)する。 On the other hand, in the second state, the moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 cannot enter the passage area 204, and the moving bodies 10 existing in the third area 203 enter the passage area 204. You can Therefore, in the second state, the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the third area 203 can move to the first area 201 or the second area 202 through the passage area 204. In the second state, one or more moving bodies 10 existing in the third area 203 enter the passage area 204 (area Z11), and the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects that the moving body 10 exists in the area Z11. Then, the state control unit 53 holds the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 in the second state. As a result, the moving bodies 10 existing in the first area 201 and the second area 202 cannot move to the passage area 204, and one or a plurality of moving bodies 10 that have entered the passage area 204 from the third area 203 pass through the passage. Only one-way movement to the area 204 is possible. After that, when one or a plurality of moving bodies 10 existing in the passage area 204 all move to the first area 201 or the second area 202 and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204, the state control unit 53 Controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G11 to G13 so that the first state and the second state are alternately repeated at a predetermined cycle.
 このように、制御システム50は、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202と、第3エリア203との間の一方通行を交互に切り替えることで、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202と、第3エリア203との間で移動体10を円滑に通行させることができる。 As described above, the control system 50 alternately switches the one-way passage between the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203, and thereby the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203. The moving body 10 can be smoothly passed to and from the area 203.
 動作例1で説明した状態制御部53の制御動作は一例であり、適宜変更が可能である。例えば、状態制御部53は、通路エリア204(区域Z11)に移動体10が存在しない状態で、移動体10から状態情報を要求する要求信号が無い場合、状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を全て不許可状態に制御してもよい。 The control operation of the state control unit 53 described in Operation Example 1 is an example, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the state control unit 53 sets the state output units G11 to G13 when there is no moving body 10 in the passage area 204 (area Z11) and there is no request signal for requesting state information from the moving body 10. You may control all the states indicated by the state information to be performed to the disallowed state.
 この状態で、例えば第1エリア201に存在する移動体10が状態出力部G11が設けられた位置に接近すると、当該移動体10は、制御システム50に状態出力部G11の状態情報を要求する要求信号を送信する。制御システム50の状態制御部53は、第1エリア201に存在する移動体10から、状態出力部G11の状態情報を要求する要求信号を受信すると、通路エリア204に移動体10が存在しないので、第1エリア201から通路エリア204への移動を許可するように、状態出力部G11~G13の状態情報を制御する。制御システム50の状態制御部53は、状態出力部G11,G12に対して設定される状態情報を許可状態を示す情報とし、状態出力部G13に対して設定される状態情報を不許可状態を示す情報とする。これにより、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、通路エリア204における移動体10の通行を、第1エリア201及び第2エリア202から通路エリア204を通って第3エリア203に移動可能な状態とする。そして、第1エリア201から通路エリア204に入った移動体10が第3エリア203に移動し、通路エリア204に移動体10が存在しない状態になると、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、状態出力部G11,G12,G13に対して設定される状態情報を全て不許可状態を示す情報とする。 In this state, for example, when the moving body 10 existing in the first area 201 approaches the position where the state output unit G11 is provided, the moving body 10 requests the control system 50 for the state information of the state output unit G11. Send a signal. When the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal requesting the state information of the state output unit G11 from the moving body 10 existing in the first area 201, the moving body 10 does not exist in the aisle area 204. The state information of the state output units G11 to G13 is controlled so that the movement from the first area 201 to the passage area 204 is permitted. The state control unit 53 of the control system 50 uses the state information set for the state output units G11 and G12 as information indicating the permitted state, and the state information set for the state output unit G13 indicates the non-permitted state. Information. As a result, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 determines that the passage of the moving body 10 in the aisle area 204 can be moved from the first area 201 and the second area 202 to the third area 203 through the aisle area 204. To do. Then, when the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from the first area 201 moves to the third area 203 and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 is in a state. The status information set for the output units G11, G12, and G13 is all information indicating the disallowed status.
 つまり、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、通路エリア204(区域Z11)に移動体10が存在しない状態で、移動体10から状態情報を要求する要求信号が無い場合、状態出力部G11~G13によって出力される状態情報を全て不許可状態を示す情報とする。そして、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、第1エリア201、第2エリア202及び第3エリア203のいずれかに存在する移動体10から状態情報を要求する要求信号を受け付けると、状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報を第1状態及び第2状態のいずれかに制御し、要求信号を送信した移動体10の通路エリア204への移動を許可する。その後、第1エリア201、第2エリア202及び第3エリア203のいずれかから通路エリア204に入った移動体10が所望のエリアに移動し、通路エリア204内に移動体10が存在しない状態になると、状態制御部53は状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報を全て不許可状態を示す情報とする。 That is, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204 (area Z11) and there is no request signal requesting the state information from the moving body 10, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 has the state output units G11 to G13. All the status information output by is the information indicating the disallowed status. Then, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal requesting the state information from the mobile body 10 existing in any of the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203, and then outputs the state output unit. The state information set for G11 to G13 is controlled to either the first state or the second state, and the moving body 10 that has transmitted the request signal is allowed to move to the passage area 204. After that, the moving body 10 that has entered the passage area 204 from any of the first area 201, the second area 202, and the third area 203 moves to a desired area, and the moving body 10 does not exist in the passage area 204. Then, the state control unit 53 sets all the state information set for the state output units G11 to G13 as information indicating the non-permission state.
 このように、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、移動体10からの要求信号を受けて、状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を決定し、決定した状態に切り替えている。状態制御部53が、移動体10からの要求信号をトリガにして、状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を切り替えるまでは、状態出力部G11~G13に対して設定される状態情報が全て不許可状態になっているので、この状態で通路エリア204に移動体10が入るのを抑制でき、円滑な通行を実現できる。 In this way, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 receives the request signal from the mobile unit 10 and determines the state indicated by the state information set to the state output units G11 to G13, and sets the determined state. Are switching. Until the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information set for the state output units G11 to G13 by using the request signal from the mobile unit 10 as a trigger, the state output units G11 to G13 are set. Since all the state information to be performed is in a disallowed state, it is possible to prevent the moving body 10 from entering the passage area 204 in this state, and it is possible to realize smooth passage.
 また、状態制御部53は、1又は複数の通行制御モジュールM1が含む複数の状態出力部G1の各々について、状態情報が示す状態が許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを制御する。状態制御部53は、複数の状態出力部G11~G13から出力される状態情報が示す状態を連系して制御(設定)することで、移動体10の円滑な通行を実現できる。状態制御部53は、複数の場所に設けられた複数の通行制御モジュールM1(M11)の状態出力部G1(G11~G13)によってそれぞれ出力される状態情報が示す状態を、許可状態と不許可状態とのいずれかに制御してもよく、移動体10の円滑な通行を実現できる。 Further, the state control unit 53 controls, for each of the plurality of state output units G1 included in the one or more traffic control modules M1, whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a non-permitted state. The state control unit 53 can realize smooth passage of the moving body 10 by connecting and controlling (setting) the states indicated by the state information output from the plurality of state output units G11 to G13. The state control unit 53 sets the states indicated by the state information output by the state output units G1 (G11 to G13) of the plurality of traffic control modules M1 (M11) provided in a plurality of places to the permitted state and the non-permitted state. It may be controlled to either of the above, and smooth passage of the moving body 10 can be realized.
 (1.3.3.2)動作例2
 図7に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例2を説明する。
(1.3.3.2) Operation example 2
An operation example 2 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 7.
 図7は、複数の移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の一部分を示す平面図である。図7の例では、所定エリアA1において、4本の通路211~214が交差するエリアを区域Z21とし、区域Z21において通路211,212,213が繋がる部分に対応して状態出力部G21,G22,G23が設けられている。つまり、所定エリアA1には、区域Z21と、区域Z21に対応して設けられた状態出力部G21,G22,G23とを含む通行制御モジュールM21が設けられている。換言すれば、通行制御モジュールM21は、区域Z21につながる複数の通路211,212,213にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部G21,G22,G23を含む。 FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move. In the example of FIG. 7, the area where the four passages 211 to 214 intersect in the predetermined area A1 is a zone Z21, and the state output parts G21, G22, corresponding to the portions where the passages 211, 212, 213 are connected in the zone Z21. G23 is provided. That is, the predetermined area A1 is provided with the traffic control module M21 including the area Z21 and the state output units G21, G22, and G23 provided corresponding to the area Z21. In other words, the traffic control module M21 includes a plurality of state output units G21, G22, G23 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 211, 212, 213 connected to the area Z21, respectively.
 動作例2では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、区域Z21に対応して設けられた状態出力部G21,G22,G23の各々によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態及び不許可状態のいずれかに制御(設定)する。 In the operation example 2, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 indicates the state indicated by the state information output by each of the state output units G21, G22, and G23 provided corresponding to the area Z21 as a permitted state and a disallowed state. Control (set) to one of.
 制御システム50の検知部52は、区域Z21に移動体10が存在するか否かを検知しており、状態制御部53は、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G21,G22,G23によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御(設定)する。例えば、状態制御部53は、区域Z21に移動体10が存在しない場合、第1切替状態と第2切替状態と第3切替状態とを、所定の切替時間が経過するごとに順番に周期的に繰り返す。ここで、第1切替状態では、状態出力部G21に対して設定される状態情報のみを許可状態を示す情報とする。第2切替状態では、状態出力部G22に対して設定される状態情報のみを許可状態を示す情報とする。第3切替状態では、状態出力部G23に対して設定される状態情報のみを許可状態を示す情報とする。 The detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 is present in the zone Z21, and the state control unit 53, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, outputs the state output units G21, G22, It controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by G23. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the zone Z21, the state control unit 53 sequentially changes the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state in order every time a predetermined switching time elapses. repeat. Here, in the first switching state, only the state information set for the state output unit G21 is the information indicating the permitted state. In the second switching state, only the state information set for the state output unit G22 is the information indicating the permitted state. In the third switching state, only the state information set for the state output unit G23 is the information indicating the permitted state.
 例えば、第1切替状態では、通路211に存在する移動体10は区域Z21に入ることができ、通路212,213に存在する移動体10は区域Z21に入ることができない。したがって、第1切替状態は、通路211に存在する移動体10のみが、区域Z21を通って通路214に移動可能な状態となる。第1切替状態において、通路211に存在する移動体10が区域Z21に入ったことを制御システム50の検知部52が検知すると、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G21,G22,G23に対して設定される状態情報を全て不許可状態を示す情報とする。これにより、通路211,212,213に存在する移動体10が交差点となる区域Z21に続けて入ってくることはできず、区域Z21に入った移動体10を、円滑に通路214に移動させることができる。 For example, in the first switching state, the moving body 10 existing in the passage 211 can enter the area Z21, and the moving body 10 existing in the passages 212 and 213 cannot enter the area Z21. Therefore, in the first switching state, only the moving body 10 existing in the passage 211 can move to the passage 214 through the zone Z21. When the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects that the moving body 10 existing in the passage 211 has entered the area Z21 in the first switching state, the state control unit 53 refers to the state output units G21, G22, and G23. All the set status information is information indicating the disallowed status. Accordingly, the moving body 10 existing in the passages 211, 212, and 213 cannot continuously enter the zone Z21 which is the intersection, and the moving body 10 that has entered the zone Z21 can be smoothly moved to the passage 214. You can
 その後、区域Z21に移動体10が存在しない状態になると、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G21~G23に対して設定される状態情報を第1切替状態、第2切替状態、及び第3切替状態の順番で周期的に繰り返す。 After that, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the area Z21, the state control unit 53 switches the state information set for the state output units G21 to G23 into the first switching state, the second switching state, and the third switching state. It repeats cyclically in the order of states.
 このように、動作例2では、通行制御モジュールM21は、区域Z21につながる複数の通路211~213にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部G21~G23を含む。状態制御部53は、複数の状態出力部G21~G23のうちの一つによって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御する場合、複数の状態出力部G21~G23のうち残りの状態出力部によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御する。これにより、制御システム50は、複数の通路を移動体10が通行する場合でも円滑な通行を実現することができる。 As described above, in the operation example 2, the traffic control module M21 includes a plurality of state output units G21 to G23 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 211 to 213 connected to the area Z21, respectively. When the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by one of the plurality of state output units G21 to G23 to the permitted state, the state control unit 53 outputs the remaining state of the plurality of state output units G21 to G23. The state indicated by the state information output by the unit is controlled to the disallowed state. As a result, the control system 50 can realize smooth passage even when the moving body 10 passes through a plurality of passages.
 (1.3.3.3)動作例3
 図8に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例3を説明する。
(1.3.3.3) Operation example 3
An operation example 3 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 8.
 図8は、複数の移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の一部分を示す平面図である。図8の例では、所定エリアA1において、通路215の途中の隣接する2つのエリアを区域Z31,Z32としている。そして、区域Z31に対応して、区域Z32と反対側から区域Z31に入る位置に状態出力部G31が設けられている。また、区域Z32に対応して、区域Z31と反対側から区域Z32に入る位置に状態出力部G32が設けられている。つまり、動作例3では、所定エリアA1内に、区域Z31と区域Z31に対応して設けられる状態出力部G31とを含む通行制御モジュールM31と、区域Z32と区域Z32に対応して設けられる状態出力部G32とを含む通行制御モジュールM32と、が設けられている。 FIG. 8 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move. In the example of FIG. 8, in the predetermined area A1, two adjacent areas in the middle of the passage 215 are defined as zones Z31 and Z32. A state output unit G31 is provided at a position corresponding to the zone Z31 and entering the zone Z31 from the side opposite to the zone Z32. Further, a state output part G32 is provided at a position corresponding to the zone Z32 and entering the zone Z32 from the side opposite to the zone Z31. That is, in the operation example 3, the traffic control module M31 including the zone Z31 and the state output unit G31 provided corresponding to the zone Z31 and the state output provided corresponding to the zones Z32 and Z32 in the predetermined area A1. And a traffic control module M32 including a section G32.
 動作例3では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、区域Z31,Z32に対応して設けられた状態出力部G31,G32の各々から出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態及び不許可状態のいずれかに制御(設定)する。 In the operation example 3, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 allows the states indicated by the state information output from the state output units G31 and G32 provided corresponding to the zones Z31 and Z32 to the permitted state and the non-permitted state, respectively. Control (set) to any of the above.
 制御システム50の検知部52は、区域Z31,Z32に移動体10が存在するか否かを検知しており、状態制御部53は、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G31,G32によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御する。例えば、状態制御部53は、区域Z31及び区域Z32に移動体10が存在しない場合、状態出力部G31に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態のみを許可状態に制御する状態と、状態出力部G32に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態のみを許可状態に制御する状態とを交互に切り替える。また、状態制御部53は、区域Z31及び区域Z32の少なくとも一方に移動体10が存在する場合、状態出力部G31,G32に対して設定される状態情報を両方ともに不許可状態に制御する。 The detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in the areas Z31 and Z32, and the state control unit 53 detects the state output unit G31, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52. It controls the state indicated by the state information output by G32. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the area Z31 and the area Z32, the state control unit 53 controls only the state indicated by the state information set for the state output unit G31 to the permitted state, and the state output unit. The state in which only the state indicated by the state information set for G32 is controlled to the permitted state is alternately switched. Further, when the moving body 10 is present in at least one of the area Z31 and the area Z32, the state control unit 53 controls both the state information set for the state output units G31 and G32 to the disallowed state.
 区域Z31及び区域Z32に移動体10が存在しない状態では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、状態出力部G31に対して設定される状態情報と状態出力部G32に対して設定される状態情報とを交互に許可状態に制御しており、いずれかの方向から区域Z31,Z32を通行可能とする。そして、区域Z31及びZ32の少なくとも一方に移動体10が存在する状態では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、状態出力部G31,G32に対してそれぞれ設定される状態情報を両方共に不許可状態に制御する。これにより、区域Z31,Z32への進入を禁止して、区域Z31,Z32内に存在する移動体10の円滑な通行を実現できる。 In the state where the moving body 10 does not exist in the area Z31 and the area Z32, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 has the state information set for the state output unit G31 and the state information set for the state output unit G32. And are alternately controlled to the permitted state, and the zones Z31 and Z32 can be passed from either direction. Then, in a state where the moving body 10 exists in at least one of the areas Z31 and Z32, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 disallows both the state information set for the state output units G31 and G32, respectively. To control. As a result, entry into the zones Z31, Z32 is prohibited, and smooth passage of the moving body 10 existing in the zones Z31, Z32 can be realized.
 また、動作例3では、所定エリアA1において移動体10が移動する経路に沿って複数の区域Z31,Z32が設けられており、複数の区域Z31,Z32を所望の場所に配置することで、移動体10の円滑な通行を実現できる。 Further, in the operation example 3, a plurality of areas Z31 and Z32 are provided along the path on which the moving body 10 moves in the predetermined area A1, and the plurality of areas Z31 and Z32 are arranged at desired locations to move. The smooth passage of the body 10 can be realized.
 (1.3.3.4)動作例4
 図9に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例4を説明する。
(1.3.3.4) Operation example 4
An operation example 4 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 9.
 図9は、複数の移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の一部分を示す平面図である。図9の例では、一方通行の通路221に、一方通行の2つの通路222,223が別々の場所で合流する場合に、通路221において通路222と合流するエリアを区域Z41とし、通路221において通路223と合流するエリアを区域Z43としている。また、通路222において、通路221と合流するエリアを待機エリアZ42とし、通路223において、通路221と合流するエリアを待機エリアZ44としている。そして、区域41に対応して、区域Z41と待機エリアZ42の間に状態出力部G42が設けられ、通路221において区域Z41の手前(移動体10が進入してくる側)に状態出力部G41が設けられる。また、区域43に対応して、区域Z43と待機エリアZ44の間に状態出力部G44が設けられ、通路221において区域Z43の手前に状態出力部G43が設けられる。ここで、区域Z41と、区域Z41につながる複数の通路221,222に設けられた状態出力部G41,G42とで通行制御モジュールM41が構成され、区域Z43と、区域Z43につながる複数の通路221,223に設けられた状態出力部G43,G44とで通行制御モジュールM43が構成される。すなわち、通行制御モジュールM41,M43は、区域Z41,Z43につながる複数の通路221,222,223にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部G41~G44を含む。 FIG. 9 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move. In the example of FIG. 9, when two one- way passages 222 and 223 join the one-way passage 221 at different places, the area where the one-way passage 222 and the passage 222 meet is defined as the area Z41, and the passage in the passage 221. The area that merges with 223 is referred to as zone Z43. Further, in the passage 222, the area where the passage 221 merges is designated as the standby area Z42, and in the passage 223, the area where the passage 221 merges is designated as the standby area Z44. Then, a state output unit G42 is provided between the area Z41 and the standby area Z42 corresponding to the area 41, and the state output unit G41 is provided in front of the area Z41 (the side where the moving body 10 enters) in the passage 221. It is provided. Further, corresponding to the area 43, the state output unit G44 is provided between the area Z43 and the standby area Z44, and the state output unit G43 is provided in front of the area Z43 in the passage 221. Here, the traffic control module M41 is composed of the area Z41 and the state output units G41 and G42 provided in the plurality of passages 211 and 222 connected to the area Z41, and the area Z43 and the plurality of passages 221 connected to the area Z43. A traffic control module M43 is configured with the status output units G43 and G44 provided in 223. That is, the traffic control modules M41 and M43 include a plurality of state output units G41 to G44 provided corresponding to the plurality of passages 221, 222 and 223 connected to the areas Z41 and Z43, respectively.
 動作例4では、通路221を通行する移動体10Aを、通路222,223から通路221に入ろうとする移動体10Bよりも優先させるように、制御システム50の状態制御部53が、状態出力部G41~G44によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御する。 In the operation example 4, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 causes the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 to give priority to the moving body 10A passing through the passage 221 over the moving body 10B trying to enter the passage 221 from the passages 222 and 223. Controls the state indicated by the state information output by G44.
 制御システム50の記憶部62には、区域Z41,Z43及び待機エリアZ42,Z44の位置情報が記憶されており、検知部52は、区域Z41,Z43及び待機エリアZ42,Z44のそれぞれで移動体10(10A,10B)の存否を検知する。 The storage unit 62 of the control system 50 stores the position information of the zones Z41, Z43 and the standby areas Z42, Z44, and the detection unit 52 causes the moving body 10 to move in each of the zones Z41, Z43 and the standby areas Z42, Z44. The presence or absence of (10A, 10B) is detected.
 制御システム50の状態制御部53は、待機エリアZ42,Z44に移動体10が存在しない状態では、状態出力部G41,G43によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御し、状態出力部G42,G44によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御する。これにより、通路221を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G41,G43が設けられる位置をそのまま通過でき、通路221において移動体10を円滑に移動させることができる。また、通路222,223に存在する移動体10Bは、状態出力部G42,G44が設けられる位置で停止するので、通路221を移動する移動体10Aの通行を妨げる可能性を低減できる。 The state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G41 and G43 to the permitted state when the moving body 10 does not exist in the standby areas Z42 and Z44, and the state output unit The state indicated by the state information output by G42 and G44 is controlled to the non-permission state. As a result, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 can pass through the positions where the state output units G41 and G43 are provided as they are, and the moving body 10 can be smoothly moved in the passage 221. Further, since the moving body 10B existing in the passages 222 and 223 stops at the position where the state output units G42 and G44 are provided, the possibility of obstructing the passage of the moving body 10A moving in the passage 221 can be reduced.
 一方、待機エリアZ42に移動体10が存在することを検知部52が検知すると、状態制御部53は、例えば所定の第1遅れ時間が経過した後の第1時点で、状態出力部G41によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態から不許可状態に変更する。これにより、通路221を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G41の手前で停止する。 On the other hand, when the detection unit 52 detects that the moving body 10 exists in the standby area Z42, the state control unit 53 outputs, for example, the state output unit G41 at the first time point after the predetermined first delay time has elapsed. The status indicated by the status information is changed from the permitted status to the disallowed status. As a result, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 stops before the state output unit G41.
 また、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G41によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に変更した第1時点から所定の第2遅れ時間(待機時間)が経過した後の第2時点で、切替対象の状態出力部G42によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態から許可状態に変更する。これにより、通路221を通行する移動体10を状態出力部G41の手前で停止させた状態で、通路222を通行する移動体10を通路221に進入させることができ、円滑な通行を実現できる。 Further, the state control unit 53 has a second time point after a predetermined second delay time (standby time) has elapsed from the first time point when the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G41 is changed to the disallowed state. Then, the state indicated by the state information output by the switching target state output unit G42 is changed from the disapproval state to the permission state. Accordingly, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 can be entered into the passage 221 in a state where the moving body 10 passing through the passage 221 is stopped before the state output unit G41, and smooth passage can be realized.
 (1.3.3.5)動作例5
 図10に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例5を説明する。
(1.3.3.5) Operation example 5
An operation example 5 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 10.
 図10は、複数の移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の一部分を示す平面図である。図10の例では、一方通行の通路231に、一方通行の通路232が合流しており、所定エリアA1には、通路231において通路232が合流するエリアに区域Z51が設けられ、通路231において区域Z51に隣接するエリアに隣接エリアZ52が設けられている。隣接エリアZ52は区域Z51に対して進行方向の手前側にある。また、通路232において区域Z51と隣接するエリアに待機エリアZ53が設けられている。ここで、区域Z51に対応して2つの状態出力部G51,G52が設けられている。状態出力部G51は、区域Z51と隣接エリアZ52との間に設けられ、状態出力部G52は、区域Z51と待機エリアZ53との間に設けられる。区域Z51と、区域Z51に対応して設けられた状態出力部G51,G52とが通行制御モジュールM51に含まれており、制御システム50の状態制御部53は状態出力部G51,G52の各々に対して設定される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態及び不許可状態のいずれかに制御(設定)する。 FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the plurality of moving bodies 10 move. In the example of FIG. 10, the one-way passage 232 merges with the one-way passage 231. In the predetermined area A1, the zone Z51 is provided in the area where the passage 232 merges in the passage 231. An adjacent area Z52 is provided in an area adjacent to the Z51. The adjacent area Z52 is on the front side in the traveling direction with respect to the area Z51. Further, a standby area Z53 is provided in an area adjacent to the area Z51 in the passage 232. Here, two state output units G51 and G52 are provided corresponding to the area Z51. The state output unit G51 is provided between the area Z51 and the adjacent area Z52, and the state output unit G52 is provided between the area Z51 and the standby area Z53. A zone Z51 and state output sections G51 and G52 provided corresponding to the zone Z51 are included in the traffic control module M51, and the state control section 53 of the control system 50 controls the state output sections G51 and G52. Control (set) the state indicated by the state information set in the above to either the permitted state or the disallowed state.
 ここで、制御システム50の記憶部62には、区域Z51、隣接エリアZ52、及び待機エリアZ53の位置情報が記憶されている。制御システム50の検知部52は、移動体10から送信される現在位置情報に基づいて、区域Z51、隣接エリアZ52、及び待機エリアZ53のそれぞれに移動体10が存在するか否かを検知する。そして、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G51,G52によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御する。 Here, the storage unit 62 of the control system 50 stores position information of the zone Z51, the adjacent area Z52, and the standby area Z53. The detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the mobile body 10 exists in each of the zone Z51, the adjacent area Z52, and the standby area Z53, based on the current position information transmitted from the mobile body 10. Then, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G51 and G52 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52.
 例えば、状態制御部53は、待機エリアZ53に移動体10が存在しない場合には、状態出力部G51によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態、状態出力部G52によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態として、通路231を通行する移動体10Aはそのまま通行させ、通路232を通行する移動体10Bは状態出力部G52の手前で停止させる。 For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the standby area Z53, the state control unit 53 permits the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G51, and the state information output by the state output unit G52. With the indicated state as the disallowed state, the moving body 10A passing through the passage 231 is allowed to pass as it is, and the moving body 10B passing through the passage 232 is stopped before the state output unit G52.
 一方、待機エリアZ53に移動体10Bが存在する状態で、区域Z51及び隣接エリアZ52の両方に移動体10が存在しなければ、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G51によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態、状態出力部G52によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態として、通路232に存在する移動体10Bが通路231に移動するのを許可する。 On the other hand, if the moving body 10B exists in the standby area Z53 and the moving body 10 does not exist in both the area Z51 and the adjacent area Z52, the state control unit 53 receives the state information output by the state output unit G51. The indicated state is regarded as a disallowed state, and the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G52 is regarded as a permitted state, and the moving body 10B existing in the passage 232 is permitted to move to the passage 231.
 動作例5では、制御システム50は通路232よりも通路231の通行を優先させており、状態出力部G51によって出力される状態情報が示す状態は通常は許可状態に設定される。そのため、通路231を通行する移動体10が走行状態から停止するまでにはある程度の時間がかかる。動作例5では、状態制御部53は、待機エリアZ53に移動体10Bが存在する場合、待機エリアZ53に繋がる区域Z51と、区域Z51の手前の隣接エリアZ52との両方に移動体10が存在しない状態で、状態出力部G52によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に変更する。したがって、通路232(待機エリアZ53)に存在する移動体10Bが区域Z51に進入した場合に、通路231に存在する移動体10Aが隣接エリアZ52から区域Z51に進入してくる可能性を低減できる。よって、制御システム50により円滑な通行を実現できる。 In the operation example 5, the control system 50 gives priority to the passage of the passage 231 over the passage 232, and the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G51 is normally set to the permitted state. Therefore, it takes a certain amount of time for the moving body 10 passing through the passage 231 to stop from the traveling state. In the operation example 5, when the moving body 10B exists in the standby area Z53, the state control unit 53 does not have the moving body 10 in both the zone Z51 connected to the standby area Z53 and the adjacent area Z52 in front of the zone Z51. In the state, the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G52 is changed to the permitted state. Therefore, when the moving body 10B existing in the passage 232 (standby area Z53) enters the zone Z51, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the moving body 10A existing in the passage 231 enters the zone Z51 from the adjacent area Z52. Therefore, smooth passage can be realized by the control system 50.
 (1.3.3.6)動作例6
 図11に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10(10A)の通行制御の動作例6を説明する。
(1.3.3.6) Operation example 6
An operation example 6 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 (10A) by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG.
 図11は、ラウンドアバウト方式の交差点に制御システム50を適用した適用例を示している。図11の例では、移動体10が平面視において反時計回りに通行する環状の通路240に、4本の通路241~244が繋がっている。そして、環状の通路240において、4本の通路241~244がそれぞれ合流するエリアに通行制御モジュールM61~M64が設けられている。 FIG. 11 shows an application example in which the control system 50 is applied to a roundabout type intersection. In the example of FIG. 11, four passages 241 to 244 are connected to an annular passage 240 through which the moving body 10 passes counterclockwise in a plan view. Then, in the annular passage 240, passage control modules M61 to M64 are provided in the areas where the four passages 241 to 244 merge, respectively.
 通行制御モジュールM61は、通路240において通路241が合流するエリアに設けられた区域Z61と、区域Z61に対応して設けられた状態出力部G611,G612とを含む。通路240において移動体10は、状態出力部G611によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z61の外部から内部へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。また、通路241を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G612によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z61へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。 The passage control module M61 includes a zone Z61 provided in the area where the passage 241 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G611 and G612 provided corresponding to the zone Z61. In the passage 240, the moving body 10 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the area Z61 based on the state information output by the state output unit G611. In addition, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 241 determines whether or not to permit passage to the zone Z61 based on the state information output by the state output unit G612.
 通行制御モジュールM62は、通路240において通路242が合流するエリアに設けられた区域Z62と、区域Z62に対応して設けられた状態出力部G621,G622とを含む。通路240を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G621によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z62の外部から内部へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。また、通路242を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G622によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z62へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。 The passage control module M62 includes an area Z62 provided in the area where the passage 242 joins in the passage 240, and state output units G621 and G622 provided corresponding to the area Z62. The moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether to permit passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z62 based on the state information output by the state output unit G621. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 242 determines whether or not to permit passage to the zone Z62, based on the state information output by the state output unit G622.
 通行制御モジュールM63は、通路240において通路243が合流するエリアに設けられた区域Z63と、区域Z63に対応して設けられた状態出力部G631,G632とを含む。通路240を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G631によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z63の外部から内部へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。また、通路243を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G632によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z63へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。 The passage control module M63 includes a zone Z63 provided in an area where the passage 243 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G631 and G632 provided corresponding to the zone Z63. The moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z63 based on the state information output by the state output unit G631. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 243 determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10 to pass through the area Z63 based on the state information output by the state output unit G632.
 通行制御モジュールM64は、通路240において通路244が合流するエリアに設けられた区域Z64と、区域Z64に対応して設けられた状態出力部G641,G642とを含む。通路240を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G641によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z64の外部から内部へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。また、通路244を通行する移動体10は、状態出力部G642によって出力される状態情報に基づいて、区域Z64へ通行するのを許可するか否かを決定する。 The passage control module M64 includes an area Z64 provided in an area where the passage 244 merges in the passage 240, and state output units G641 and G642 provided corresponding to the area Z64. The moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 determines whether or not to allow passage from the outside to the inside of the zone Z64 based on the state information output by the state output unit G641. Further, the moving body 10 passing through the passage 244 determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10 to pass through the area Z64 based on the state information output by the state output unit G642.
 また、動作例6では、通路241~244には、それぞれ、通路240と合流するエリアに待機エリアZ65~Z68が設けられており、待機エリアZ65~Z68の位置情報は記憶部62に登録されている。 Further, in the operation example 6, each of the passages 241 to 244 is provided with the standby areas Z65 to Z68 in an area that joins with the passage 240, and the position information of the standby areas Z65 to Z68 is registered in the storage unit 62. There is.
 ここで、制御システム50の検知部52は、移動体10から取得する現在位置情報に基づいて、区域Z61~Z64及び待機エリアZ65~Z68のそれぞれで移動体10が存在するか否かを検知する。そして、状態制御部53が、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、通行制御モジュールM61~M64が含む状態出力部G611~G641,G612~G642によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御(設定)しており、ラウンドアバウト方式の交差点での通行を円滑に制御することができる。 Here, the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in each of the areas Z61 to Z64 and the standby areas Z65 to Z68 based on the current position information acquired from the moving body 10. .. Then, the state control unit 53 controls (sets) the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G611 to G641 and G612 to G642 included in the traffic control modules M61 to M64 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly control the traffic at the roundabout intersection.
 例えば、待機エリアZ65~Z68に移動体10が存在しない状態では、状態制御部53が、状態出力部G611,621,631,G641によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態、状態出力部G612,622,632,G642によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態とする。これにより、通路241~244から通路240に移動体10は進入することができず、通路240を通行する移動体10の通行が優先される。 For example, in a state where the moving body 10 does not exist in the standby areas Z65 to Z68, the state control unit 53 allows the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G611, 621, 631, and G641 to be the permitted state and the state output unit G612. , 622,632, The state indicated by the state information output by G642 is regarded as a disallowed state. As a result, the moving body 10 cannot enter the passage 240 from the passages 241 to 244, and the passage of the moving body 10 passing through the passage 240 is prioritized.
 一方、例えば待機エリアZ65に移動体10Aが存在すると、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G611によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態から不許可状態に切り替える。その後、所定の待機時間が経過した時点で、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G611によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態から許可状態に切り替える。これにより、待機エリアZ241に存在する移動体10Aが通路240へ進入することができる。 On the other hand, for example, when the moving body 10A is present in the standby area Z65, the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G611 from the permitted state to the prohibited state. After that, when the predetermined standby time has elapsed, the state control unit 53 switches the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G611 from the disallowed state to the permitted state. As a result, the moving body 10A existing in the standby area Z241 can enter the passage 240.
 (1.3.3.7)動作例7
 図12に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例7を説明する。
(1.3.3.7) Operation example 7
An operation example 7 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG.
 図12の例では、通路251の一部に区域Z71を設け、区域Z71に対応して状態出力部G71が設けられている。ここで、区域Z71に対応して設けられた状態出力部G71と、区域Z71との間には停止禁止区域252(図12のハッチング部分)が設けられている。停止禁止区域252は、例えば、通路251と交差する別の通路である。状態出力部G71に対して設定される状態情報が不許可状態を示している場合、移動体10を、停止禁止区域252よりも手前の位置で停止させることができ、停止禁止区域252に移動体10が停止する可能性を低減できる。 In the example of FIG. 12, the zone Z71 is provided in a part of the passage 251, and the state output unit G71 is provided corresponding to the zone Z71. Here, a stop prohibition area 252 (hatched portion in FIG. 12) is provided between the state output unit G71 provided corresponding to the area Z71 and the area Z71. The stop prohibition area 252 is, for example, another passage that intersects with the passage 251. When the state information set for the state output unit G71 indicates the non-permission state, the moving body 10 can be stopped at a position before the stop-prohibiting area 252, and the mobile body can be stopped in the stop-prohibiting area 252. The possibility that 10 will stop can be reduced.
 (1.3.3.8)動作例8
 図13に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例8を説明する。
(1.3.3.8) Operation example 8
An operation example 8 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 13.
 図13は、通路261の途中にすれ違いのための退避路262が設けられている所定エリアA1に制御システム50を適用した適用例を示している。 FIG. 13 shows an application example in which the control system 50 is applied to a predetermined area A1 in which an evacuation path 262 for passing each other is provided in the middle of the passage 261.
 図13の例では、退避路262の一端が通路261に合流(接続)するエリアに区域Z81が設けられ、区域Z81に対応して状態出力部G81が設けられている。状態出力部G81は、退避路262の一端が通路261と接続する位置に設けられ、退避路262に存在する移動体10Cが通路261に入るのを許可するか否かを決定する。 In the example of FIG. 13, the area Z81 is provided in the area where one end of the evacuation path 262 joins (connects) with the passage 261, and the state output unit G81 is provided corresponding to the area Z81. The state output unit G81 is provided at a position where one end of the evacuation path 262 is connected to the passage 261 and determines whether or not to allow the moving body 10C existing in the evacuation path 262 to enter the passage 261.
 また、通路261において、退避路262の他端が通路261に合流(接続)するエリアに区域Z82が設けられ、区域Z82に対応して状態出力部G82が設けられている。状態出力部G82は、通路261において退避路262の他端が繋がる位置に設けられ、通路261に存在する移動体10Bが区域Z82に入るのを許可するか否かを決定する。 Further, in the passage 261, a zone Z82 is provided in an area where the other end of the evacuation path 262 joins (connects) with the passage 261, and a state output unit G82 is provided corresponding to the zone Z82. The state output unit G82 is provided at a position where the other end of the retreat path 262 is connected in the passage 261, and determines whether or not the moving body 10B existing in the passage 261 is allowed to enter the zone Z82.
 ここで、制御システム50の検知部52は、区域Z81~Z82のそれぞれで移動体10が存在するか否かを検知する。例えば、区域Z81~Z82に移動体10が存在しない場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G81,G82によってそれぞれ出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御し、移動体10の通行を許可する。一方、区域Z81に移動体10Aが存在する場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G81によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御し、退避路262に存在する移動体10Cが区域Z81に移動するのを規制する。また、区域Z82に移動体10Dが存在する場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G82によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御し、通路261内を区域Z82に向かって移動する移動体10Bを状態出力部G82の手前で停止させる。これにより、移動体10Dは、移動体10Bによって通行が妨げられることなく、退避路262に移動することができる。 Here, the detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the moving body 10 exists in each of the zones Z81 to Z82. For example, when the moving body 10 does not exist in the zones Z81 to Z82, the state control unit 53 controls the states indicated by the state information output by the state output units G81 and G82 to be the permitted state and allows the moving body 10 to pass. To give permission. On the other hand, when the moving body 10A is present in the zone Z81, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G81 to the non-permitted state, and the moving body 10C present in the evacuation path 262 is Restrict movement to zone Z81. When the moving body 10D is present in the zone Z82, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G82 to be the non-permission state, and moves in the passage 261 toward the zone Z82. The moving body 10B is stopped before the state output unit G82. As a result, the moving body 10D can move to the evacuation path 262 without being obstructed by the moving body 10B.
 このように、状態制御部53が、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G81,G82によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御しており、移動体10が円滑にすれ違い通行を行えるように制御することができる。 In this way, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output units G81 and G82 based on the detection result of the detection unit 52, and the moving body 10 smoothly passes by. It can be controlled so that it can be done.
 (1.3.3.9)動作例9
 図14に基づいて制御システム50による移動体10の通行制御の動作例9を説明する。
(1.3.3.9) Operation example 9
An operation example 9 of the traffic control of the moving body 10 by the control system 50 will be described based on FIG. 14.
 図14は、所定エリアA1において、移動体10の充電スペースSP1,SP2の手前に設けられた待機エリアに通行制御モジュールM91が設けられている。ここで、通行制御モジュールM91は、待機エリアに設けられた区域Z91と、区域Z91に対応して設けられた状態出力部G91を含む。状態出力部G91によって出力される状態情報は、区域Z91に繋がる通路271から区域Z91に移動体10が入るのを許可する許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す情報である。 In FIG. 14, a traffic control module M91 is provided in a standby area provided in front of the charging spaces SP1 and SP2 of the moving body 10 in the predetermined area A1. Here, the traffic control module M91 includes a zone Z91 provided in the standby area and a state output unit G91 provided corresponding to the zone Z91. The state information output by the state output unit G91 is information indicating whether the state is a permission state in which the moving body 10 is permitted to enter the zone Z91 from the passage 271 connected to the zone Z91, or a non-permission state.
 制御システム50の検知部52は、区域Z91及び充電スペースSP1,SP2に移動体10が存在するか否かを検知する。 The detection unit 52 of the control system 50 detects whether or not the mobile body 10 exists in the zone Z91 and the charging spaces SP1 and SP2.
 制御システム50の状態制御部53は、検知部52の検知結果に基づいて、状態出力部G91によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態及び不許可状態のいずれかに制御する。 The state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G91 to be either a permitted state or a disallowed state, based on the detection result of the detection unit 52.
 例えば、区域Z91に移動体10が存在する場合、又は充電スペースSP1,SP2の両方に移動体10が存在する場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G91によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御し、移動体10を状態出力部G91の手前で停止させる。 For example, when the moving body 10 exists in the zone Z91, or when the moving body 10 exists in both the charging spaces SP1 and SP2, the state control unit 53 sets the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G91. The mobile body 10 is controlled in the non-permitted state and stopped before the state output unit G91.
 一方、区域Z91に移動体10が存在せず、かつ、充電スペースSP1,SP2の少なくとも一方に移動体10が存在しない場合、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G91によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御し、移動体10を区域Z91内に進入させる。 On the other hand, when the mobile unit 10 does not exist in the zone Z91 and the mobile unit 10 does not exist in at least one of the charging spaces SP1 and SP2, the state control unit 53 indicates the state information output by the state output unit G91. The state is controlled to the permitted state, and the moving body 10 is made to enter the area Z91.
 ここで、区域Z91には、移動体10の停止位置を示すノードND1,ND2が設定されている。充電スペースSP1,SP2には充電器301,302が設置されており、充電スペースSP1,SP2には移動体10の停止位置を示すノードND3,ND4が設定されている。移動体10は、各ノードND1~ND4の位置情報及び充電器301,302の設置位置に関する位置情報を記憶部32に記憶している。 Here, nodes ND1 and ND2 indicating the stop position of the moving body 10 are set in the area Z91. Chargers 301 and 302 are installed in the charging spaces SP1 and SP2, and nodes ND3 and ND4 indicating the stop positions of the moving body 10 are set in the charging spaces SP1 and SP2. The mobile unit 10 stores in the storage unit 32 the position information of the nodes ND1 to ND4 and the position information regarding the installation positions of the chargers 301 and 302.
 ここで、状態出力部G91によって出力される状態情報が示す状態が許可状態となり、移動体10が区域Z91内に移動すると、移動体10はノードND1,ND2のうち、移動体10が存在していない充電スペースに対応したノードの位置で停止する。移動体10が、例えばノードND1で停止すると、移動体10はノードND1から充電スペースSP1内のノードND3に移動し、その後、充電器301と接続して充電される。移動体10は、充電が完了すると充電器301から離脱してノードND3に移動し、ノードND3からノードND1に移動する。その後、移動体10は区域Z91の外に出て、所定エリアA1内の所望の位置に移動する。 Here, when the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G91 is the permitted state and the moving body 10 moves into the zone Z91, the moving body 10 has the moving body 10 among the nodes ND1 and ND2. Stop at the node position corresponding to no charging space. When the mobile body 10 stops at, for example, the node ND1, the mobile body 10 moves from the node ND1 to the node ND3 in the charging space SP1 and is then connected to the charger 301 to be charged. When charging is completed, the mobile unit 10 leaves the charger 301, moves to the node ND3, and moves from the node ND3 to the node ND1. Then, the moving body 10 goes out of the zone Z91 and moves to a desired position in the predetermined area A1.
 (1.4)変形例
 上記の実施形態1は、本開示の様々な実施形態の一つに過ぎない。上記実施形態1は、本開示の目的を達成できれば、設計等に応じて種々の変更が可能である。また、制御システム50と同様の機能は、制御システム50の制御方法、コンピュータプログラム、又はプログラムを記録した非一時的な記録媒体等で具現化されてもよい。一態様に係る制御システム50の制御方法は、所定エリアA1内を移動する移動体10の通行を制御する。制御方法は、第1の設定処理と、第2の設定処理と、制御処理とを含む。第1の設定処理は、移動体10が移動する所定エリアA1の一部に区域Z1を設定する処理である。第2の設定処理は、区域Z1に対応して、状態情報を出力するための状態出力部G1を設ける処理である。状態情報は、第1方向D1、及び、第2方向D2の少なくとも一方で、移動体10の通行を許可する許可状態であるか移動体10の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す情報である。第1方向D1は、移動体10が区域Z1の外部から内部に移動する方向である。第2方向D2は、移動体10が区域Z1の内部から外部に移動する方向である。制御処理では、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態又は不許可状態に制御する。一態様に係る(コンピュータ)プログラムは、コンピュータシステムに、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態又は不許可状態に制御する処理を実行させるためのプログラムである。
(1.4) Modifications The first embodiment described above is only one of various embodiments of the present disclosure. The first embodiment can be variously modified according to the design and the like as long as the object of the present disclosure can be achieved. Further, the same function as the control system 50 may be embodied by a control method of the control system 50, a computer program, a non-transitory recording medium recording the program, or the like. The control method of the control system 50 according to one aspect controls the passage of the moving body 10 moving in the predetermined area A1. The control method includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process. The first setting process is a process of setting the zone Z1 in a part of the predetermined area A1 in which the moving body 10 moves. The second setting process is a process of providing a state output unit G1 for outputting the state information, corresponding to the zone Z1. The state information indicates whether the moving state of the moving body 10 is permitted in at least one of the first direction D1 and the second direction D2, or whether the moving body 10 is not permitted. This is the information to be shown. The first direction D1 is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the outside to the inside of the zone Z1. The second direction D2 is a direction in which the moving body 10 moves from the inside of the zone Z1 to the outside. In the control process, the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 is controlled to be the permitted state or the disallowed state. A (computer) program according to one aspect is a program for causing a computer system to execute a process of controlling the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to a permitted state or a disallowed state.
 以下、実施形態1の変形例を列挙する。以下に説明する変形例は、適宜組み合わせて適用可能である。以下では、上記実施形態1を「基本例」と呼ぶこともある。 The following is a list of modifications of the first embodiment. The modifications described below can be applied in appropriate combination. Hereinafter, the first embodiment may be referred to as a “basic example”.
 本開示における制御システム50は、コンピュータシステムを含んでいる。コンピュータシステムは、ハードウェアとしてのプロセッサ及びメモリを主構成とする。コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムをプロセッサが実行することによって、本開示における制御システム50としての機能が実現される。プログラムは、コンピュータシステムのメモリに予め記録されてもよく、電気通信回線を通じて提供されてもよく、コンピュータシステムで読み取り可能なメモリカード、光学ディスク、ハードディスクドライブ等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。コンピュータシステムのプロセッサは、半導体集積回路(IC)又は大規模集積回路(LSI)を含む1ないし複数の電子回路で構成される。ここでいうIC又はLSI等の集積回路は、集積の度合いによって呼び方が異なっており、システムLSI、VLSI(Very Large Scale Integration)、又はULSI(Ultra Large Scale Integration)と呼ばれる集積回路を含む。さらに、LSIの製造後にプログラムされる、FPGA(Field-Programmable Gate Array)、又はLSI内部の接合関係の再構成若しくはLSI内部の回路区画の再構成が可能な論理デバイスについても、プロセッサとして採用することができる。複数の電子回路は、1つのチップに集約されていてもよいし、複数のチップに分散して設けられていてもよい。複数のチップは、1つの装置に集約されていてもよいし、複数の装置に分散して設けられていてもよい。ここでいうコンピュータシステムは、1以上のプロセッサ及び1以上のメモリを有するマイクロコントローラを含む。したがって、マイクロコントローラについても、半導体集積回路又は大規模集積回路を含む1ないし複数の電子回路で構成される。 The control system 50 in the present disclosure includes a computer system. The computer system mainly comprises a processor as a hardware and a memory. The function as the control system 50 in the present disclosure is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system. The program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. readable by the computer system. May be provided. A processor in a computer system is composed of one or more electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit (IC) or a large scale integrated circuit (LSI). The integrated circuit such as an IC or an LSI referred to here has a different name depending on the degree of integration, and includes an integrated circuit called a system LSI, VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration), or ULSI (Ultra Large Scale Integration). Furthermore, FPGAs (Field-Programmable Gate Arrays) that are programmed after the manufacture of LSIs, or logic devices that can be reconfigured for junction relationships within LSIs or for circuit sections within LSIs should also be adopted as processors. You can The plurality of electronic circuits may be integrated in one chip, or may be distributed and provided in the plurality of chips. The plurality of chips may be integrated in one device, or may be distributed and provided in the plurality of devices. The computer system referred to here includes a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories. Therefore, the microcontroller is also composed of one or a plurality of electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit or a large scale integrated circuit.
 また、制御システム50における複数の機能が、1つの筐体内に集約されていることは制御システム50に必須の構成ではなく、制御システム50の構成要素は、複数の筐体に分散して設けられていてもよい。さらに、制御システム50の少なくとも一部の機能、例えば、状態制御部53等の一部の機能がクラウド(クラウドコンピューティング)等によって実現されてもよい。 Further, it is not an essential configuration for the control system 50 that a plurality of functions in the control system 50 are integrated in one housing, and the components of the control system 50 are distributed and provided in the plurality of housings. May be. Furthermore, at least a part of the functions of the control system 50, for example, a part of the functions of the state control unit 53 and the like may be realized by a cloud (cloud computing) or the like.
 通行制御モジュールM1は、所定エリアA1内の所望の位置に設けられた実体を有するものでもよい。この場合、制御システム50は、所定エリアA1に配置される通行制御モジュールM1を備え、通行制御モジュールM1の状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態又は不許可状態に制御する。ここで、通行制御モジュールM1の状態出力部G1は、状態情報を光、音、及び電波のいずれかで出力すればよく、移動体10は、状態出力部G1から光、音、及び電波のいずれかで出力される状態情報を直接取得し、状態情報に基づいて移動するか停止するかを決定する。 The traffic control module M1 may have an entity provided at a desired position in the predetermined area A1. In this case, the control system 50 includes the traffic control module M1 arranged in the predetermined area A1, and controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 to be the permitted state or the non-permitted state. .. Here, the state output unit G1 of the traffic control module M1 may output the state information by any one of light, sound, and radio waves, and the moving body 10 outputs any one of light, sound, and radio waves by the state output unit G1. The state information output by is directly obtained, and it is determined whether to move or stop based on the state information.
 状態出力部G1は、実空間において、所定エリアA1に設けられる区域Z1に対応する位置に設けられ、第1方向及び第2方向の少なくとも一方で、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を、光、音、又は電波信号等により移動体10に直接出力してもよい。 The state output unit G1 is provided in a position corresponding to the zone Z1 provided in the predetermined area A1 in the real space, and determines whether the state is the permitted state or the unpermitted state in at least one of the first direction and the second direction. The state information shown may be directly output to the moving body 10 by light, sound, a radio wave signal, or the like.
 また、状態制御部53は、移動体10が移動する目的(例えば、移動体10が搬送する荷物の種類等)に応じて、状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報が示す状態を制御してもよい。例えば、移動体10が搬送する荷物を目的地までより早く届けたい場合には、状態制御部53は、状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御して、優先的に通行させてもよい。 Further, the state control unit 53 may control the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 according to the purpose for which the moving body 10 moves (for example, the type of luggage carried by the moving body 10). Good. For example, when it is desired to deliver the package carried by the mobile unit 10 to the destination earlier, the state control unit 53 controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit G1 to be the permitted state and preferentially. You may pass by.
 基本例では、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報は、第1方向D1において移動体10の移動を許可するか否かを示しているが、第2方向D2において移動体10の移動を許可するか否かを示すものでもよい。また、状態出力部G1によって出力される状態情報は、第1方向D1と第2方向D2の両方で、移動体10の移動を許可するか否かを示すものでもよい。 In the basic example, the state information output by the state output unit G1 indicates whether or not the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in the first direction D1, but the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in the second direction D2. It may indicate whether or not to do so. Further, the state information output by the state output unit G1 may indicate whether or not the movement of the moving body 10 is permitted in both the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
 基本例では、移動体10がパレット40を搬送しているが、移動体10が搬送する物品はパレット40に限定されず、パレット40以外の物品を運んでもよい。また、移動体10は物品を搬送する搬送装置に限定されず、人を運ぶ移動体でもよい。また、移動体10は所定エリアA1を走行する搬送車であるが、移動体10は、船舶(自律走行船)又は航空機(ドローン)でもよい。移動体10が自律航行船である場合、自律航行船が航行する水域が所定エリアA1になり、移動体10がドローンである場合、ドローンが飛行する空間が所定エリアA1になる。 In the basic example, the moving body 10 carries the pallet 40, but the article carried by the moving body 10 is not limited to the pallet 40, and articles other than the pallet 40 may be carried. Further, the moving body 10 is not limited to a carrying device that carries articles, and may be a moving body that carries people. Further, the moving body 10 is a carrier vehicle that travels in the predetermined area A1, but the moving body 10 may be a ship (autonomous traveling ship) or an aircraft (drone). When the mobile body 10 is an autonomous navigation ship, the water area in which the autonomous navigation ship travels is the predetermined area A1, and when the mobile body 10 is a drone, the space in which the drone flies is the predetermined area A1.
 (実施形態2)
 (2.1)概要
 本実施形態に係る制御システム50は、図15に示すように、取得部54と、対価発生部55と、を備えている。取得部54は、所定エリアA1における複数台の移動体10の動作に関する動作情報を取得する。対価発生部55は、取得部54で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する。制御システム50は、所定エリアA1内を移動する複数台の移動体10を制御する。
(Embodiment 2)
(2.1) Overview As shown in FIG. 15, the control system 50 according to the present embodiment includes an acquisition unit 54 and a consideration generation unit 55. The acquisition unit 54 acquires operation information regarding the operations of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 in the predetermined area A1. The consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54. The control system 50 controls the plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in the predetermined area A1.
 本開示でいう「対価」は、複数台の移動体10の各々に対して発生するインセンティブ又はペナルティである。「対価」は、例えば、金銭(クレジット及び仮想通貨等を含む)、ポイント(点数)、物品、又は移動体10のメンテナンス等のサービスを含む特典等で実現される。 The "compensation" referred to in the present disclosure is an incentive or a penalty generated for each of a plurality of mobile bodies 10. The "compensation" is realized by, for example, benefits including services such as money (including credits and virtual currency), points (points), goods, and maintenance of the moving body 10.
 以上説明した制御システム50によれば、複数台の移動体10の動作に関する動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかに対する対価が発生する。そのため、移動体10においては、ある特定の動作をすることについてモチベーション(動機付け)が与えられる。例えば、複数台の移動体10の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得るような場合に、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作について、対価としてインセンティブが発生することとする。そうすると、干渉を生じ得る移動体10のうち少なくとも1つにあっては、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作を積極的に採用することで、経路の変更を含む動作が特定の移動体10に集中しにくくなる。結果的に、複数台の移動体10間で作業効率の不平等が生じにくい、という利点がある。 According to the control system 50 described above, based on the operation information related to the operation of the plurality of mobile bodies 10, a compensation for any one of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 is generated. Therefore, in the moving body 10, motivation (motivation) is given to perform a specific movement. For example, when there is a possibility that the movements of a plurality of mobile units 10 interfere with each other, an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change that avoids the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies 10 that can cause interference, by positively adopting an operation including a route change that avoids the interference, the operation including the route change is a specific movement. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the body 10. As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among a plurality of moving bodies 10.
 (2.2)詳細
 以下、本実施形態に係る制御システム50及び移動体システム1の構成について、図1及び図15を参照して、詳細に説明する。以下の説明において、実施形態1と共通する構成要素には、同一の符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
(2.2) Details Hereinafter, the configurations of the control system 50 and the mobile system 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 and 15. In the following description, the same components as those of the first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
 本実施形態の移動体システム1は、図15に示すように、制御システム50と、複数台の移動体10と、を備えている。制御システム50は、上位システム51Aを有している。複数台の移動体10の各々は、下位システム21Aを有している。ここで、上位システム51A等の「上位」、及び下位システム21A等の「下位」は、単に、両者を区別するためのラベルとして用いているのであって、各々の地位及び順位等を特定する意味ではない。 The mobile body system 1 of the present embodiment includes a control system 50 and a plurality of mobile bodies 10 as shown in FIG. The control system 50 has a host system 51A. Each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 has a lower system 21A. Here, the "upper" of the upper system 51A and the like and the "lower" of the lower system 21A and the like are simply used as labels for distinguishing between the two, and have the meaning of specifying their respective positions and ranks. is not.
 本実施形態では、上位システム51A及び下位システム21Aの各々は、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。すなわち、コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムを、プロセッサが実行することにより、上位システム51A及び下位システム21Aの各々の機能が実現される。プログラムはメモリに予め記録されていてもよいし、インターネット等の電気通信回線を通して提供されてもよく、メモリカード等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。 In the present embodiment, each of the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A has a computer system including a memory and a processor as a main configuration. That is, each function of the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system. The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card.
 制御システム50に含まれる上位システム51Aは、複数台の移動体10を統括的に制御するためのシステムである。一方、移動体10に含まれる下位システム21Aは、上位システム51Aからの指示に従って、個々の移動体10を実際に制御するためのシステムである。言い換えれば、制御システム50は、上位システム51Aから各移動体10の下位システム21Aに指示を出すことで、複数台の移動体10を間接的に制御する。



 本実施形態に係る制御システム50は、例えばサーバ装置で実現されており、図15に示すように、上位システム51Aと、通信部61と、記憶部62と、を備えている。通信部61及び記憶部62は実施形態1と共通の構成を有しているので、その説明は省略する。
The host system 51A included in the control system 50 is a system for integrally controlling a plurality of mobile bodies 10. On the other hand, the lower system 21A included in the mobile unit 10 is a system for actually controlling the individual mobile units 10 according to an instruction from the upper system 51A. In other words, the control system 50 indirectly controls the plurality of moving bodies 10 by issuing an instruction from the upper system 51A to the lower system 21A of each moving body 10.



The control system 50 according to the present embodiment is realized by, for example, a server device, and includes a host system 51A, a communication unit 61, and a storage unit 62, as shown in FIG. Since the communication unit 61 and the storage unit 62 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.
 上位システム51Aは、検知部52と、状態制御部53と、取得部54と、対価発生部55と、協調制御部56と、を有している。 The upper system 51A has a detection unit 52, a state control unit 53, an acquisition unit 54, a consideration generation unit 55, and a cooperation control unit 56.
 上位システム51Aは、例えば、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。すなわち、コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムを、プロセッサが実行することにより、上位システム51Aの機能(例えば、検知部52、状態制御部53、取得部54、対価発生部55及び協調制御部56等の機能)が実現される。プログラムはメモリに予め記録されていてもよいし、インターネット等の電気通信回線を通して提供されてもよく、メモリカード等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。ここにおいて、検知部52及び状態制御部53は実施形態1と共通の構成を有しているので、その説明は省略する。 The upper system 51A mainly has a computer system including a memory and a processor, for example. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the host system 51A (for example, the detection unit 52, the state control unit 53, the acquisition unit 54, the consideration generation unit 55, and the cooperation control unit 56). And other functions) are realized. The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card. Here, since the detection unit 52 and the state control unit 53 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.
 取得部54は、所定エリアA1における複数台の移動体10の動作に関する動作情報を取得する。本開示でいう「動作情報」は、移動体10の動作に関する全般を含み、例えば、所定エリアA1内での移動体10の現在位置を示す現在位置情報、及び移動体10の移動速度及び移動方向等の情報を含む。取得部54は、動作情報を、通信部61を介して、移動体10から取得してもよいし、上位システム51A内にて取得してもよい。すなわち、上位システム51Aは、移動体10の制御に係る情報を扱っているので、上位システム51A内で扱われている情報にも、移動体10の動作に関する情報(動作情報)が含まれている。例えば、状態制御部53がいずれかの移動体10(優先移動体)について、後述の優先制御を行う場合には、状態出力部G1によって移動体10(優先移動体)が優先制御されることになる。このような場合に、状態制御部53で扱われる情報、つまり状態制御部53がいずれかの移動体10(優先移動体)について優先制御を行う際に使用する情報は、移動体10(優先移動体)の動作に関する動作情報となる。優先制御について詳しくは「(2.3.3)優先制御」の欄で説明する。 The acquisition unit 54 acquires operation information regarding the operation of the plurality of mobile units 10 in the predetermined area A1. The "motion information" referred to in the present disclosure includes general movements of the moving body 10, for example, current position information indicating the current position of the moving body 10 in a predetermined area A1, and moving speed and moving direction of the moving body 10. Including information such as. The acquisition unit 54 may acquire the operation information from the mobile unit 10 via the communication unit 61, or may acquire the operation information within the host system 51A. That is, since the host system 51A handles information related to the control of the mobile unit 10, the information handled within the host system 51A also includes information about the operation of the mobile unit 10 (motion information). .. For example, when the state control unit 53 performs the later-described priority control for any of the moving bodies 10 (priority moving bodies), the state output unit G1 preferentially controls the moving bodies 10 (priority moving bodies). Become. In such a case, the information handled by the state control unit 53, that is, the information used when the state control unit 53 performs the priority control on any one of the moving bodies 10 (priority moving bodies) is the moving body 10 (priority movement). It becomes the movement information about the movement of the body). Details of the priority control will be described in the section “(2.3.3) Priority control”.
 対価発生部55は、取得部54で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかに対する対価を発生する。本開示でいう「対価」は、上述したように、インセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる。対価発生部55について詳しくは「(2.3.1)対価の発生」の欄で説明する。 The consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration for any one of the plurality of mobile units 10 based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54. The “consideration” in the present disclosure includes at least one of an incentive and a penalty, as described above. Details of the consideration generating unit 55 will be described in the section “(2.3.1) Occurrence of consideration”.
 協調制御部56は、協調制御を実行する。協調制御は、複数台の移動体10のうちの1台の移動体10を対象移動体とし、複数台の移動体10のうち対象移動体以外の協力移動体を制御することで、対象移動体の進路を確保する制御である。ここで、協調制御部56における協力移動体の制御は、協力移動体の移動及び停止のいずれも含む。すなわち、協調制御部56が協調制御を行うことで、例えば、協力移動体としての移動体10を通路100の端に停車させ、その間に、対象移動体としての移動体10が協力移動体を追い抜くように対象移動体としての移動体10を制御することができる。協調制御について詳しくは「(2.3.2)協調制御」の欄で説明する。 The cooperative control unit 56 executes cooperative control. In the cooperative control, one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is set as the target moving body, and the target moving body is controlled by controlling the cooperative moving body other than the target moving body among the plurality of moving bodies 10. It is a control to secure the course of. Here, the control of the cooperative moving body in the cooperative control unit 56 includes both movement and stop of the cooperative moving body. That is, the cooperative control unit 56 performs the cooperative control to stop the moving body 10 as the cooperative moving body at the end of the passage 100, for example, and the moving body 10 as the target moving body overtakes the cooperative moving body in the meantime. Thus, the moving body 10 as the target moving body can be controlled. Details of the cooperative control will be described in the section “(2.3.2) Cooperative control”.
 次に、本実施形態で例示する移動体10の構成についてより詳細に説明する。 Next, the configuration of the moving body 10 illustrated in the present embodiment will be described in more detail.
 移動体10は、図15に示すように、下位システム21Aと、通信部31と、記憶部32と、位置検知部33と、走行装置34と、報知部35と、を備える。移動体10の下位システム21A、通信部31、記憶部32、位置検知部33、走行装置34、及び報知部35は本体部11に搭載されている。通信部31、記憶部32、位置検知部33、及び走行装置34は実施形態1と共通の構成を有しているので、通信部31、記憶部32、位置検知部33、及び走行装置34の説明は省略する。 As shown in FIG. 15, the mobile body 10 includes a lower system 21A, a communication unit 31, a storage unit 32, a position detection unit 33, a traveling device 34, and a notification unit 35. The lower system 21A of the mobile unit 10, the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detection unit 33, the traveling device 34, and the notification unit 35 are mounted on the main body unit 11. Since the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detection unit 33, and the traveling device 34 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the communication unit 31, the storage unit 32, the position detecting unit 33, and the traveling device 34 The description is omitted.
 報知部35は、音及び/又は表示(光を含む)等による報知を行う。これにより、報知部35は、移動体10の周囲の人(作業者等)に対して、報知を行うことが可能である。本実施形態では、報知部35は、少なくとも協調制御に際して報知を行う。 The notification unit 35 gives notification by sound and/or display (including light). As a result, the notification unit 35 can notify a person (worker or the like) around the moving body 10. In the present embodiment, the notification unit 35 performs notification at least during cooperative control.
 下位システム21Aは、経路取得部22と、状態情報取得部24と、走行制御部23と、要求生成部25と、を有している。 The lower system 21A includes a route acquisition unit 22, a state information acquisition unit 24, a travel control unit 23, and a request generation unit 25.
 下位システム21Aは、例えば、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。すなわち、コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムを、プロセッサが実行することにより、下位システム21Aの機能(例えば、経路取得部22、状態情報取得部24、走行制御部23及び要求生成部25等の機能)が実現される。プログラムはメモリに予め記録されていてもよいし、インターネット等の電気通信回線を通して提供されてもよく、メモリカード等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。経路取得部22、状態情報取得部24、及び走行制御部23は実施形態1と共通の構成を有しているので、経路取得部22、状態情報取得部24、及び走行制御部23の説明は省略する。 The lower system 21A mainly has a computer system including a memory and a processor, for example. That is, when the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the functions of the lower system 21A (for example, the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, the travel control unit 23, the request generation unit 25, and the like). Function) is realized. The program may be pre-recorded in a memory, provided through a telecommunication line such as the Internet, or may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card. Since the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, and the travel control unit 23 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description of the route acquisition unit 22, the state information acquisition unit 24, and the travel control unit 23 will be described. Omit it.
 要求生成部25は、協調制御を開始するための要求(協調要求)を生成し、制御システム50に対して送信する。 The request generation unit 25 generates a request (cooperative request) for starting cooperative control and transmits it to the control system 50.
 (2.3)動作
 以下、本実施形態に係る制御システム50及び制御システム50の制御対象である移動体10の動作について図16~図21を参照して、詳細に説明する。以下では実施形態1と共通する動作説明は省略し、本実施形態の特徴部分の動作について説明する。
(2.3) Operation Hereinafter, the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment and the moving body 10 that is a control target of the control system 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. The description of the operation common to the first embodiment will be omitted below, and the operation of the characteristic part of the present embodiment will be described.
 (2.3.1)対価の発生
 次に、制御システム50の動作のうち、対価発生部55の動作、つまり取得部54で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかに対する対価を発生する対価発生処理について詳しく説明する。
(2.3.1) Generation of Consideration Next, among the operations of the control system 50, any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is based on the operation of the consideration generation unit 55, that is, the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit 54. The consideration generation process for generating the consideration will be described in detail.
 本開示でいう「対価」は、上述したように、複数台の移動体10の各々に対して発生するインセンティブ又はペナルティである。「対価」は、例えば、金銭(クレジット及び仮想通貨等を含む)、ポイント(点数)、物品、又は移動体10のメンテナンス等のサービスを含む特典等で実現される。一例として、対価としてのインセンティブの給付又はペナルティの受領は、制御システム50の所有者等が行い、インセンティブの受領又はペナルティの支払いは、移動体10の所有者等が行う。対価の精算(給付及び受領)は、移動体10による作業が完了する度に行われてもよいし、所定の算定期間(例えば、1ヵ月)ごとに行われてもよい。 The “compensation” in the present disclosure is an incentive or a penalty generated for each of the plurality of mobile units 10 as described above. The "compensation" is realized by, for example, benefits including services such as money (including credits and virtual currency), points (points), goods, and maintenance of the moving body 10. As an example, the owner of the control system 50 or the like receives the incentive benefit or the penalty as a consideration, and the owner or the like of the mobile body 10 receives the incentive or pays the penalty. The settlement of consideration (benefit and receipt) may be performed every time the work by the mobile body 10 is completed, or may be performed every predetermined calculation period (for example, one month).
 本実施形態では、対価は様々な状況で発生し得る。そこで、以下では、制御システム50の協調制御時、優先制御時、及びその他の状況のそれぞれについて、対価発生部55の動作を説明する。 In this embodiment, consideration may occur in various situations. Therefore, hereinafter, the operation of the consideration generating unit 55 will be described for the cooperative control of the control system 50, the priority control, and other situations.
 (2.3.2)協調制御
 まず、協調制御時における対価発生部55の動作(対価発生処理)について、図16~図17Cを参照して説明する。
(2.3.2) Coordinated Control First, the operation of the value generation unit 55 (value generation processing) during the cooperative control will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 17C.
 図16は、所定エリアA1の一部の領域の模式的な平面図である。図16の例において、所定エリアA1は、作業エリアA11と通路エリアA12と通路エリアA13と待機エリアA14とを含んでいる。ここで、作業エリアA11は、移動体10による作業が行われるエリアであって、作業エリアA11には、複数の搬送対象物40が配置されている。通路エリアA12,A13は、作業エリアA11と他のエリアとの間をつなぐ通路となるエリアである。移動体10は、例えば、作業(搬送対象物40の搬送作業)を行うに際して、作業エリアA11内で搬送対象物40をピックアップし、通路エリアA12又は通路エリアA13を通って、所定エリアA1内での搬送対象物40の搬送を行う。 FIG. 16 is a schematic plan view of a part of the predetermined area A1. In the example of FIG. 16, the predetermined area A1 includes a work area A11, a passage area A12, a passage area A13, and a waiting area A14. Here, the work area A11 is an area in which work by the moving body 10 is performed, and a plurality of objects 40 to be transported are arranged in the work area A11. The passage areas A12 and A13 are areas that serve as passages connecting the work area A11 and other areas. For example, when performing a work (transport work of the transport object 40), the moving body 10 picks up the transport object 40 in the work area A11, passes through the passage area A12 or the passage area A13, and within the predetermined area A1. The object to be transported 40 is transported.
 待機エリアA14は、移動体10が作業エリアA11での作業(搬送作業)待ちのために待機するエリアである。ここで、待機エリアA14は、複数台の移動体10が環状に並んで待機できるように、ロータリ形状の通路を構成する。これにより、待機エリアA14においては、複数台の移動体10が一列に並んで待機することが可能である。図16の例では、6台の移動体10が、作業エリアA11での作業待ちのための待機列を成して待機している。この状態において、作業エリアA11での新規の作業が発生した場合には、複数台(ここでは6台)の移動体10のうち、待機列の先頭に位置する移動体10が、作業を実行する。つまり、待機列の先頭に位置する移動体10は、作業エリアA11に進入して搬送対象物40をピックアップし、搬送対象物40の搬送を行う。 The standby area A14 is an area in which the moving body 10 waits for work (transportation work) in the work area A11. Here, the waiting area A14 constitutes a rotary-shaped passage so that the plurality of moving bodies 10 can be lined up in a ring and stand by. As a result, in the waiting area A14, a plurality of moving bodies 10 can stand by in a line. In the example of FIG. 16, six moving bodies 10 are waiting in a waiting line for waiting for work in the work area A11. In this state, when a new work occurs in the work area A11, the moving body 10 located at the head of the waiting line among the moving bodies 10 of a plurality of units (6 units in this case) executes the work. .. That is, the moving body 10 located at the head of the waiting line enters the work area A11, picks up the conveyance target 40, and conveys the conveyance target 40.
 上述したような待機エリアA14に位置する移動体10を対象として協調制御を実行する場合について、図17A~図17Cを参照して説明する。図17A~図17Cは、図16の例における待機エリアA14(及びその周辺)の領域のみを示す模式的な平面図である。図17Aの例では、6台の移動体10A~10Fが待機エリアA14に待機列を成している。6台の移動体10A~10Fを特に区別しない場合、6台の移動体10A~10Fの各々を単に「移動体10」ともいう。 A case where cooperative control is executed for the moving body 10 located in the standby area A14 as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A to 17C. 17A to 17C are schematic plan views showing only the area of the standby area A14 (and its periphery) in the example of FIG. In the example of FIG. 17A, six mobile bodies 10A to 10F form a waiting line in the waiting area A14. Unless the six moving bodies 10A to 10F are particularly distinguished, each of the six moving bodies 10A to 10F is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
 ここでは、図17Aに示すような待機列が構成されている状況において、待機列の途中に位置する移動体10Cが待機列から抜ける場合を想定する。待機列の途中に位置する移動体10Cが待機列から抜けるためには、この移動体10Cの進路上に位置する他の移動体10A,10Bが、移動体10Cのために進路を空ける必要がある。このような場合において、本実施形態に係る制御システム50は、協調制御を実行する。 Here, it is assumed that the moving body 10C located in the middle of the waiting line comes out of the waiting line in a situation where the waiting line is configured as shown in FIG. 17A. In order for the moving body 10C located in the middle of the waiting line to exit from the waiting line, the other moving bodies 10A and 10B located on the path of this moving body 10C need to make a way for the moving body 10C. .. In such a case, the control system 50 according to the present embodiment executes cooperative control.
 協調制御は、上述したように、複数台の移動体10のうちの1台の移動体10を対象移動体とし、複数台の移動体10のうち対象移動体以外の協力移動体を制御することで、対象移動体の進路を確保する制御である。ここでは、移動体10Cが「対象移動体」であり、それ以外の移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fが「協力移動体」である。 As described above, the cooperative control is to control one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 as a target moving body and control a cooperative moving body other than the target moving body among the plurality of moving bodies 10. Thus, the control is to secure the course of the target moving body. Here, the moving body 10C is the "target moving body", and the other moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F are the "cooperative moving bodies".
 このような状況において、協調制御部56は、協調制御を実行することにより、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fを制御することで、対象移動体としての移動体10Cの進路を確保する。すなわち、協調制御は、対象移動体の移動に際して、協力移動体の協力を仰ぐことで、対象移動体をスムーズに移動させる制御である。 In such a situation, the cooperation control unit 56 controls the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies by executing the cooperative control, and thus the moving body 10C as the target moving body. Secure the course of. That is, the cooperative control is a control for smoothly moving the target moving body by asking the cooperation of the cooperating moving body when the target moving body moves.
 本実施形態では、協調制御部56は、対象移動体からの要求に応じて、協調制御を実行する。具体的には、下位システム21Aの要求生成部25が、制御システム50に対して協調要求を出力することにより、協調制御部56が協調制御を開始する。移動体10(対象移動体)からの要求は、移動体10の制御を司る下位システム21Aからの要求を含む。つまり、下位システム21Aが移動体10と別体である場合においても、移動体10を配下に持つ下位システム21Aからの要求は、移動体10からの要求とみなされる。 In the present embodiment, the cooperative control unit 56 executes cooperative control in response to a request from the target mobile body. Specifically, the request generation unit 25 of the lower system 21A outputs a cooperation request to the control system 50, and the cooperation control unit 56 starts cooperative control. The request from the moving body 10 (target moving body) includes a request from the lower system 21A that controls the moving body 10. That is, even when the lower system 21A is separate from the moving body 10, the request from the lower system 21A having the moving body 10 under its control is regarded as the request from the moving body 10.
 そのため、図17Aの例では、対象移動体としての移動体10Cからの要求があって初めて、協調制御が開始することになる。よって、対象移動体としての移動体10Cは、例えば、待機列から抜ける必要が生じた場合に、要求(協調要求)を出力する。待機列から抜ける必要が生じた場合の例として、蓄電池の残容量が低下し、所定エリアA1内に設定されている充電スペースに移動する必要が生じた場合、及び、所定エリアA1内の作業エリアA11以外での作業が発生した場合等がある。 Therefore, in the example of FIG. 17A, the cooperative control is started only when there is a request from the mobile unit 10C as the target mobile unit. Therefore, the moving body 10C as the target moving body outputs a request (cooperation request), for example, when there is a need to exit the waiting line. As an example of the case where it is necessary to get out of the waiting line, when the remaining capacity of the storage battery decreases and it becomes necessary to move to the charging space set in the predetermined area A1, and the work area in the predetermined area A1 There are cases where work other than A11 occurs.
 また、本実施形態では、協調制御部56は、協調制御に際して対象移動体の周囲に報知する。すなわち、協調制御部56は、協調制御を行う場合には、対象移動体の周囲の人(作業者等)に、対象移動体及び協力移動体の移動が始まることを知らせるため、音及び/又は表示(光を含む)等により、報知を行う。具体的には、協調制御部56は、対象移動体に報知信号を送信することにより、対象移動体の報知部35に、音及び/又は表示等による報知を行わせる。これにより、例えば、対象移動体の進路上に、障害物が放置されているような場合等において、対象移動体の周囲の人に、障害物の撤去を促すことが可能である。 Further, in the present embodiment, the cooperative control unit 56 notifies the surroundings of the target moving body at the time of cooperative control. That is, when performing cooperative control, the cooperative control unit 56 makes a sound and / or informs a person (worker or the like) around the target moving body that the movement of the target moving body and the cooperative moving body is started. Notification is given by display (including light). Specifically, the cooperation control unit 56 causes the notification unit 35 of the target moving body to notify by sound and/or display by transmitting a notification signal to the target moving body. As a result, for example, when an obstacle is left in the path of the target moving object, it is possible to encourage people around the target moving object to remove the obstacle.
 図17Aの例では、対象移動体としての移動体10Cが、音(クラクション)による報知を行う。対象移動体としての移動体10Cは、協調制御部56からの報知信号を待たずに、例えば、協調要求を出力するのと同時に、報知を開始してもよい。 In the example of FIG. 17A, the moving body 10C as the target moving body performs notification by sound (horn). The moving body 10C as the target moving body may start the notification at the same time as outputting the cooperation request, for example, without waiting for the notification signal from the cooperation control unit 56.
 また、協調制御部56は、複数台の移動体10のうち、所定エリアA1における対象移動体の進路に関連する領域に存在する移動体10のみを協力移動体とする。すなわち、所定エリアA1に存在する対象移動体以外の全ての移動体10を協力移動体とすると、対象移動体の移動に一切関係ない移動体10にまで、協力移動体として協調制御を強いることになる。そこで、本実施形態では、対象移動体の進路に関連する領域に存在する移動体10に絞って、協力移動体とすることで、無関係な移動体10に協調制御を強いることを回避している。対象移動体の進路に関連する領域は、対象移動体の進路だけでなく、いずれかの協力移動体の進路のように、対象移動体の進路に間接的に関連する領域も含む。 Further, the cooperative control unit 56 sets only the mobile body 10 existing in the area related to the route of the target mobile body in the predetermined area A1 among the plurality of mobile bodies 10 as the cooperative mobile body. That is, if all the moving bodies 10 other than the target moving body existing in the predetermined area A1 are the cooperative moving bodies, the moving body 10 that is not related to the movement of the target moving body is forced to perform the cooperative control as the cooperative moving body. Become. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by focusing on the moving body 10 existing in the region related to the course of the target moving body and making it a cooperative moving body, it is possible to avoid forcing the unrelated moving body 10 to perform cooperative control. .. The area related to the course of the target moving body includes not only the course of the target moving body but also the area indirectly related to the course of the target moving body such as the course of any cooperative moving body.
 図17Aの例では、対象移動体としての移動体10Cの進路に関連する領域は、待機エリアA14である。そのため、協調制御部56は、待機エリアA14に位置する複数の移動体10A~10Fのうち、移動体10C(対象移動体)以外の移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fを「協力移動体」とする。 In the example of FIG. 17A, the area related to the course of the moving body 10C as the target moving body is the standby area A14. Therefore, the cooperation control unit 56 selects the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F other than the moving body 10C (target moving body) among the plurality of moving bodies 10A to 10F located in the standby area A14 as “cooperating moving bodies”. ".
 そして、協調制御部56は、対象移動体の進路上に位置する協力移動体を移動させることで、対象移動体の進路を確保する。すなわち、協調制御部56は、対象移動体の進路上の協力移動体を、対象移動体の進路上から退避するように移動させることで、対象移動体の進路を空ける。言い換えれば、協調制御では、協力移動体が、対象移動体に道を譲ることにより、対象移動体の進路が確保され、対象移動体が進路上を移動可能となる。 Then, the cooperation control unit 56 secures the path of the target moving body by moving the cooperative moving body located on the path of the target moving body. That is, the cooperative control unit 56 vacates the course of the target moving body by moving the cooperative moving body on the course of the target moving body so as to evacuate from the course of the target moving body. In other words, in cooperative control, the cooperative mobile body gives way to the target mobile body to secure the path of the target mobile body, and the target mobile body can move on the path.
 図17Aの例では、対象移動体としての移動体10Cの進路上、つまり移動体10Cの前方には、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10Bが位置している。そこで、協調制御が開始すると、図17Bに示すように、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10Bが移動を開始する。これにより、対象移動体としての移動体10Cは、待機エリアA14から通路エリアA12へと移動可能となる。さらに、本実施形態では、協調制御部56は、協力移動体としての移動体10D,10E,10Fについては、移動体10Bに追従するように移動させる。 In the example of FIG. 17A, the moving bodies 10A and 10B as cooperative moving bodies are located on the path of the moving body 10C as the target moving body, that is, in front of the moving body 10C. Therefore, when the cooperative control is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the moving bodies 10A and 10B as cooperative moving bodies start moving. As a result, the moving body 10C as the target moving body can move from the standby area A14 to the aisle area A12. Further, in the present embodiment, the cooperation control unit 56 moves the moving bodies 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperative moving bodies so as to follow the moving body 10B.
 その後、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fは、図17Cに示すように、ロータリ形状の通路を構成している待機エリアA14を、一巡(1周)するように移動する。これにより、少なくとも待機列の先頭に位置する移動体10Aにおいては、協調制御後において、待機列の先頭に戻ることになる。すなわち、本実施形態では、協調制御部56は、対象移動体の進路を確保して対象移動体の移動が完了した後に、協力移動体を協調制御の前の位置に移動させる。これにより、協調制御の前後において、待機列に並ぶ複数台の移動体10の順番が大きく変わることを回避できる。図17Cの例では、移動体10Cが抜けたことで、移動体10D,10E,10Fは、移動体10Cの分だけ待機列の前方(移動体10B側)に詰めている。 After that, the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies move so as to make one round (one lap) in the standby area A14 that constitutes the rotary-shaped passage, as shown in FIG. 17C. To do. As a result, at least the moving body 10A located at the head of the waiting line returns to the head of the waiting line after the cooperative control. That is, in the present embodiment, the cooperative control unit 56 secures the course of the target moving body and moves the cooperative moving body to the position before the cooperative control after the movement of the target moving body is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the order of the plurality of moving bodies 10 arranged in the waiting line from being significantly changed before and after the cooperative control. In the example of FIG. 17C, since the moving body 10C is removed, the moving bodies 10D, 10E, and 10F are packed in front of the waiting line (on the moving body 10B side) by the amount of the moving body 10C.
 以上説明したような協調制御により、待機列の途中に位置する移動体10Cは、待機列から抜けることが可能である。 By the cooperative control as described above, the moving body 10C located in the middle of the waiting line can escape from the waiting line.
 ところで、本実施形態に係る制御システム50では、対価発生部55は、協調制御が実行される場合に、対象移動体と協力移動体との少なくとも一方に対する対価を発生する。すなわち、上述した例では、対象移動体としての移動体10C、及び協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fの少なくとも一方に対して、対価が発生することになる。 By the way, in the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, the consideration generating unit 55 generates a consideration for at least one of the target moving body and the cooperative moving body when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the above-described example, a consideration is generated for at least one of the moving body 10C as the target moving body and the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperating moving bodies.
 本実施形態では、対価発生部55は、協調制御が実行される場合に、対象移動体に対して対価としてペナルティを発生する。つまり、図17A~図17Cの例では、対象移動体としての移動体10Cに対して、対価としてペナルティが発生することになる。要するに、協調制御においては、対象移動体を移動可能とするために、対象移動体以外の移動体10(協力移動体)の協力を仰ぐ必要があり、協力移動体の機会損失等につながる可能性がある。そこで、移動体10が無暗に対象移動体として協調制御を利用することを抑制するため、対象移動体となる移動体10については、ペナルティを課すことが好ましい。 In the present embodiment, the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for the target moving body when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, a penalty will be incurred for the moving body 10C as the target moving body. In short, in the coordinated control, in order to make the target moving body movable, it is necessary to seek cooperation from the moving body 10 (cooperating moving body) other than the target moving body, which may lead to opportunity loss of the cooperative moving body. There is. Therefore, in order to prevent the mobile body 10 from silently using cooperative control as the target mobile body, it is preferable to impose a penalty on the mobile body 10 as the target mobile body.
 一方で、対価発生部55は、協調制御が実行される場合に、協力移動体に対して対価としてインセンティブを発生する。つまり、図17A~図17Cの例では、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fに対して、対価としてインセンティブが発生する。要するに、協調制御においては、対象移動体を移動可能とするために、対象移動体以外の移動体10(協力移動体)の協力を仰ぐ必要があり、協力移動体の機会損失等につながる可能性がある。そこで、協力移動体となる移動体10には、協調制御による不利益を補填するため、インセンティブを支払うことが好ましい。 On the other hand, the consideration generation unit 55 generates an incentive as a consideration for the cooperative mobile when the cooperative control is executed. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, an incentive is generated as a consideration for the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies. In short, in the coordinated control, in order to make the target moving body movable, it is necessary to seek cooperation from the moving body 10 (cooperating moving body) other than the target moving body, which may lead to opportunity loss of the cooperative moving body. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to pay an incentive to the moving body 10 which is a cooperative moving body in order to compensate for the disadvantage due to the cooperative control.
 また、対象移動体に対する対価として発生するペナルティと、協力移動体に対する対価として発生するインセンティブとは、互いに釣り合っていてもよい。これにより、1回の協調制御に伴って生じるペナルティとインセンティブとを、互いに相殺させることが可能である。 Also, the penalty generated as a consideration for the target mobile unit and the incentive generated as a consideration for the cooperative mobile unit may be balanced with each other. This makes it possible to offset the penalties and incentives that accompany one coordinated control with each other.
 図18は、図17A~図17Cに示す協調制御を、対価発生部55の動作も含めて表す模式的なシーケンス図である。 FIG. 18 is a schematic sequence diagram showing the cooperative control shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, including the operation of the consideration generating unit 55.
 すなわち、図18に示すように、対象移動体としての移動体10Cから制御システム50に対して、協調要求(S21)が出力されることにより、協調制御が開始する。制御システム50は、協調要求を受けると、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fに対して移動指示(S22)を出力する。協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fは、移動指示に対して承諾した上で、移動を開始する。制御システム50は、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fから移動指示に対する返信があると、対象移動体としての移動体10Cに結果通知(S23)を出力する。 That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the cooperative control is started when the cooperative request (S21) is output from the mobile body 10C as the target mobile body to the control system 50. Upon receiving the cooperation request, the control system 50 outputs a movement instruction (S22) to the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies. The mobile bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as cooperative mobile bodies start the movement after accepting the movement instruction. The control system 50 outputs a result notification (S23) to the moving body 10C as the target moving body when the moving body 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, 10F as the cooperative moving body receives a reply to the movement instruction.
 ここでいう「結果通知」は、協調要求に対する結果の通知であって、対象移動体からの協調要求が、協力移動体に受け入れられた(承諾された)か否かを示す通知である。制御システム50は、協力移動体から移動指示を承諾する旨の返信を受けると、対象移動体からの協調要求が協力移動体に受け入れられたと判断し、対象移動体に、要求承諾を示す結果通知を出力する。反対に、協力移動体から移動指示を拒否する旨の返信を受けると、制御システム50は、対象移動体からの協調要求が協力移動体に受け入れられなかったと判断し、対象移動体に、要求拒否を示す結果通知を出力する。対象移動体としての移動体10Cは、要求承諾を示す結果通知を受けると、移動を開始する。 The "result notification" here is a notification of the result for the cooperation request, and is a notification indicating whether or not the cooperation request from the target moving body has been accepted (accepted) by the cooperating moving body. When the control system 50 receives a reply from the cooperating mobile body to accept the movement instruction, the control system 50 determines that the cooperation request from the target mobile body has been accepted by the cooperating mobile body, and notifies the target mobile body of a result indicating the request acceptance. Is output. On the contrary, when receiving a reply from the cooperating mobile body to reject the movement instruction, the control system 50 determines that the cooperative request from the target moving body has not been accepted by the cooperating moving body, and rejects the request to the target moving body. Outputs a result notification indicating. The mobile unit 10C as the target mobile unit starts moving upon receiving the result notification indicating the request acceptance.
 ここまでの一連の処理により、協調制御が実現される。そして、協調要求が承諾された場合には、制御システム50は、対象移動体としての移動体10Cに対しては、対価としてのペナルティ(S24)を発生する。また、制御システム50は、協力移動体としての移動体10A,10B,10D,10E,10Fに対しては、対価としてのインセンティブ(S25)を発生する。 -Cooperative control is realized by the series of processes up to this point. Then, when the cooperation request is accepted, the control system 50 incurs a penalty (S24) as a consideration for the moving body 10C as the target moving body. Further, the control system 50 generates an incentive (S25) as a consideration for the moving bodies 10A, 10B, 10D, 10E, and 10F as the cooperative moving bodies.
 (2.3.3)優先制御
 次に、優先制御時における対価発生部55の動作(対価発生処理)について、図19を参照して説明する。
(2.3.3) Priority Control Next, the operation of the value generation unit 55 (value generation processing) during priority control will be described with reference to FIG.
 図19は、所定エリアA1の一部の領域の模式的な平面図である。図19の例において、所定エリアA1は、幹線エリアA21と複数の支線エリアA22~A27とを含んでいる。ここで、幹線エリアA21は、移動体10が通行するための通路となるエリアであって、図19の例では、左右方向に延びる直線状のエリアである。複数の支線エリアA22~A27は、いずれも移動体10が通行するための通路となるエリアであって、幹線エリアA21につながっている。図19の例では、複数の支線エリアA22~A27は、いずれも上下方向に延びる直線状のエリアである。 FIG. 19 is a schematic plan view of a part of the predetermined area A1. In the example of FIG. 19, the predetermined area A1 includes a main line area A21 and a plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27. Here, the main area A21 is an area that serves as a passage for the moving body 10 to pass through, and in the example of FIG. 19, is a linear area extending in the left-right direction. The plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are all areas that serve as passages for the moving body 10 to pass through, and are connected to the main line area A21. In the example of FIG. 19, the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are all linear areas extending in the vertical direction.
 図19の例では、所定エリアA1において、幹線エリアA21と一対の支線エリアA22,A23とが交差するエリアを区域Z31とし、この区域Z31に3つの状態出力部G1が設けられている。同様に、所定エリアA1において、幹線エリアA21と一対の支線エリアA24,A25とが交差するエリアを区域Z32とし、この区域Z32に3つの状態出力部G1が設けられている。同様に、所定エリアA1において、幹線エリアA21と一対の支線エリアA26,A27とが交差するエリアを区域Z33とし、この区域Z33に3つの状態出力部G1が設けられている。この例では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、各区域Z31~Z33に対応して設けられた3つの状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報の状態をそれぞれ制御する。図19では、状態情報が許可状態にある状態出力部G1を、「〇印」を付した実線のベクトルB1で表記し、状態情報が不許可状態にある状態出力部G1を、「×印」を付した点線のベクトルB1で表記する。 In the example of FIG. 19, in the predetermined area A1, an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A22 and A23 intersect is a zone Z31, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z31. Similarly, in the predetermined area A1, an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A24 and A25 intersect is defined as a zone Z32, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z32. Similarly, in the predetermined area A1, an area where the main line area A21 and the pair of branch line areas A26 and A27 intersect is defined as a zone Z33, and three state output parts G1 are provided in the zone Z33. In this example, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state of the state information corresponding to the three state output units G1 provided corresponding to each area Z31 to Z33. In FIG. 19, the state output unit G1 in which the state information is in the permitted state is represented by a solid line vector B1 with a “◯” mark, and the state output unit G1 in which the state information is in the unauthorized state is indicated by “X”. It is indicated by a dotted vector B1 with.
 上述したような所定エリアA1に位置する移動体10を対象として優先制御を実行する場合について、図19を参照して説明する。図19の例では、所定エリアA1内に4台の移動体10A~10Dが存在している。4台の移動体10A~10Dを特に区別しない場合、4台の移動体10A~10Dの各々を単に「移動体10」ともいう。 A case where priority control is executed for the moving body 10 located in the predetermined area A1 as described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the example of FIG. 19, four moving bodies 10A to 10D are present in the predetermined area A1. When the four moving bodies 10A to 10D are not particularly distinguished, each of the four moving bodies 10A to 10D is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
 優先制御は、複数台の移動体10のうちの1台の移動体10を優先移動体とし、優先移動体の進路上の状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態を優先的に許可状態とすることで、優先移動体の進路を確保する制御である。すなわち、状態制御部53は、複数台の移動体10のうちの1台である優先移動体の進路上の状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態を優先的に許可状態とする優先制御を実行する。ここでは、4台の移動体10A~10Dのうち、幹線エリアA21を走行中の移動体10Aが「優先移動体」である場合を例示する。 In the priority control, one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 is set as the priority moving body, and the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the path of the priority moving body is preferentially permitted. By doing so, control is performed to secure the route of the priority moving body. That is, the state control unit 53 preferentially permits the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the path of the priority mobile body, which is one of the plurality of mobile bodies 10. Execute. Here, of the four mobile units 10A to 10D, the case where the mobile unit 10A traveling in the main area A21 is the “priority mobile unit” is illustrated.
 この場合において、状態制御部53は、優先移動体としての移動体10Aの進路上の状態出力部G1、つまり幹線エリアA21上の状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態を優先的に許可状態とする。言い換えれば、複数の支線エリアA22~A27から幹線エリアA21への進入を制御する状態出力部G1に対して、幹線エリアA21上の状態出力部G1を優先的に許可状態とする。具体的には、状態制御部53は、複数の支線エリアA22~A27から幹線エリアA21への進入を制御する状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態は、いずれも不許可状態とし、幹線エリアA21上の状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態を許可状態とする。これにより、図19に示すように、幹線エリアA21上の状態出力部G1は全て許可状態となり、複数の支線エリアA22~A27上の状態出力部G1は全て不許可状態となる。 In this case, the state control unit 53 gives priority to the state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the route of the moving body 10A as the preferential moving body, that is, the state output unit G1 on the main area A21. And In other words, the state output unit G1 on the main line area A21 is preferentially set to the permitted state with respect to the state output unit G1 that controls entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27. Specifically, the state control unit 53 sets all of the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 that controls the entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 to the non-permitted state, The state of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the A21 is set as the permitted state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19, all the state output parts G1 on the main line area A21 are in the permitted state, and all the state output parts G1 on the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are in the non-permitted state.
 上述したような優先制御が実行されることにより、優先移動体としての移動体10Aの進路上の状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態は全て許可状態であるため、移動体10Aは止まることなく幹線エリアA21を通行できる。一方、複数の支線エリアA22~A27から幹線エリアA21への進入を制御する状態出力部G1が出力する状態情報の状態は全て不許可状態であるので、優先移動体以外の移動体10B~10Dにおいては、複数の支線エリアA22~A27から幹線エリアA21への進入が制限される。結果的に、優先移動体としての移動体10Aの進路上の信号機が全て「青信号」であるかのように、優先移動体としての移動体10Aの通行が、優先移動体以外の移動体10B~10Dの通行に対して優先される。 By executing the priority control as described above, the moving body 10A stops because all the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 on the course of the moving body 10A as the priority moving body are permitted states. You can pass through the main line area A21 without any. On the other hand, since all the states of the state information output by the state output unit G1 that controls entry into the main line area A21 from the plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27 are non-permitted states, in the moving bodies 10B to 10D other than the priority moving body Is restricted from entering the main line area A21 from a plurality of branch line areas A22 to A27. As a result, as if all the traffic lights on the route of the moving body 10A as the preferential moving body are "green light", the passage of the moving body 10A as the preferential moving body is not limited to the moving body 10B other than the preferential moving body. Priority is given to 10D traffic.
 以上説明したような優先制御により、幹線エリアA21を走行中の移動体10Aは、幹線エリアA21を優先的に通行可能である。また、優先制御についても、協調制御と同様に、優先移動体からの要求(優先要求)に応じて、優先制御が開始することが好ましい。 By the priority control as described above, the moving body 10A traveling in the main area A21 can preferentially pass through the main area A21. As for the priority control, like the cooperative control, it is preferable that the priority control is started in response to a request (priority request) from the priority mobile unit.
 ところで、本実施形態に係る制御システム50では、対価発生部55は、優先制御が実行される場合に、優先移動体に対する対価としてペナルティを発生する。すなわち、図19の例では、優先移動体としての移動体10Aに対して、ペナルティが発生することになる。要するに、優先制御においては、優先移動体を優先的に移動可能とするために、状態出力部G1が不公平に操作され、優先移動体以外の移動体10の機会損失等につながる可能性がある。そこで、移動体10が無暗に優先移動体として優先制御を利用することを抑制するため、優先移動体となる移動体10については、ペナルティを課すことが好ましい。 By the way, in the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for a priority moving body when the priority control is executed. That is, in the example of FIG. 19, a penalty occurs for the moving body 10A as the priority moving body. In short, in the priority control, the state output unit G1 is operated unfairly in order to preferentially move the priority mobile unit, which may lead to an opportunity loss of the mobile units 10 other than the priority mobile unit. .. Therefore, in order to prevent the mobile unit 10 from silently using priority control as the priority mobile unit, it is preferable to impose a penalty on the mobile unit 10 to be the priority mobile unit.
 また、対価発生部55は、優先制御が実行される場合に、優先移動体以外の移動体10に対して対価としてインセンティブを発生してもよい。つまり、図19の例では、移動体10B~10Dに対して、対価としてインセンティブが発生してもよい。さらに、優先移動体に対する対価として発生するペナルティと、優先移動体以外の移動体10に対する対価として発生するインセンティブとは、互いに釣り合っていてもよい。これにより、1回の優先制御に伴って生じるペナルティとインセンティブとを、互いに相殺させることが可能である。 Further, the consideration generating unit 55 may generate an incentive as a consideration for the mobile bodies 10 other than the priority moving body when the priority control is executed. That is, in the example of FIG. 19, incentives may be generated as compensation for the mobile units 10B to 10D. Further, the penalty generated as a consideration for the priority moving body and the incentive generated as a consideration for the moving body 10 other than the priority moving body may be balanced with each other. This makes it possible to cancel out the penalties and incentives that accompany one priority control.
 (2.3.4)その他
 次に、協調制御及び優先制御以外の状況における対価発生部55の動作(対価発生処理)について説明する。
(2.3.4) Others Next, the operation (value generation processing) of the value generation unit 55 in situations other than cooperative control and priority control will be described.
 1つ目の例として、対価発生部55は、複数台の移動体10の各々について、状態情報の遵守状況に応じて対価を発生する。すなわち、移動体10が状態出力部G1に対応する状態情報に従って動作しているか否かによって、対価が発生する。一例として、状態出力部G1の状態情報が不許可状態であるのに、移動体10が、状態出力部G1が設けられている位置の手前で停止しなかった場合には、この移動体10に対し、対価としてのペナルティの対象となる。つまり、状態出力部G1の指示に違反した移動体10については、他の移動体10との衝突等のリスクが高いため、この是正を促すためにペナルティを課すことが好ましい。反対に、一定期間にわたって状態出力部G1の指示を遵守し続けているような移動体10に対しては、対価としてのインセンティブが発生してもよい。つまり、状態情報を遵守する優良な移動体10に対しては、他の移動体10の見本とするべくインセンティブを支払うことが好ましい。 As a first example, the consideration generation unit 55 generates a consideration for each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 according to the status information compliance status. That is, a consideration is generated depending on whether or not the moving body 10 operates according to the state information corresponding to the state output unit G1. As an example, when the moving body 10 does not stop before the position where the state output unit G1 is provided even though the state information of the state output unit G1 is the non-permitted state, On the other hand, it is subject to a penalty as consideration. That is, since the moving body 10 that violates the instruction of the state output unit G1 has a high risk of collision with other moving bodies 10, it is preferable to impose a penalty in order to promote the correction. On the contrary, an incentive may be generated as compensation for the mobile body 10 that continues to comply with the instruction of the state output unit G1 for a certain period. That is, it is preferable to pay an incentive to the excellent moving body 10 that complies with the state information so as to serve as a sample of another moving body 10.
 2つ目の例として、対価発生部55は、複数台の移動体10の各々について、特定区間A31(図20参照)への進入と引き換えに対価を発生する。本実施形態では、図20に示すように、所定エリアA1は特定区間A31を含んでいる。図20の例では、所定エリアA1は、特定区間A31に加えて、通常区間A32、及び支線エリアA33を含んでいる。ここで、特定区間A31及び通常区間A32は、いずれも移動体10が通行するための通路となるエリアであって、図20の例では、左右方向に延びる直線状のエリアである。支線エリアA33は、移動体10が通行するための通路となるエリアであって、通常区間A32につながっている。図20の例では、支線エリアA33は、上下方向に延びる直線状のエリアである。 As a second example, the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of mobile units 10 in exchange for entering the specific section A31 (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the predetermined area A1 includes a specific section A31. In the example of FIG. 20, the predetermined area A1 includes a normal section A32 and a branch line area A33 in addition to the specific section A31. Here, the specific section A31 and the normal section A32 are both areas that serve as passages for the moving body 10 to pass through, and in the example of FIG. 20, they are linear areas extending in the left-right direction. The branch line area A33 is an area that serves as a passage for the moving body 10 to pass through, and is connected to the normal section A32. In the example of FIG. 20, the branch line area A33 is a linear area extending in the vertical direction.
 図20の例では、所定エリアA1において、通常区間A32と支線エリアA33とが交差するエリアを区域Z21とし、この区域Z21に2つの状態出力部G21,G22が設けられている。この例では、制御システム50の状態制御部53は、区域Z21に対応して設けられた2つの状態出力部G21,G22が出力する状態情報の状態をそれぞれ制御する。図20の例では、特定区間A31内に1台の移動体10Aが存在し、通常区間A32内に1台の移動体10Bが存在する。2台の移動体10A,10Bを特に区別しない場合、2台の移動体10A,10Bの各々を単に「移動体10」ともいう。 In the example of FIG. 20, in the predetermined area A1, the area where the normal section A32 and the branch line area A33 intersect is a zone Z21, and two state output parts G21 and G22 are provided in the zone Z21. In this example, the state control unit 53 of the control system 50 controls the state of the state information output by the two state output units G21 and G22 provided corresponding to the area Z21, respectively. In the example of FIG. 20, one moving body 10A exists in the specific section A31, and one moving body 10B exists in the normal section A32. When the two moving bodies 10A and 10B are not particularly distinguished, each of the two moving bodies 10A and 10B is also simply referred to as "moving body 10".
 すなわち、図20の例では、特定区間A31は、状態出力部G21,G22が存在しないエリアである。そのため、移動体10Aは止まることなく特定区間A31を通行できる。このような特定区間A31は、高速道路(又は自動車専用道路)に相当する。結果的に、特定区間A31を通行する移動体10Aは、通常区間A32を走行する移動体10Bに比べて、目的地に早く到達可能である。 That is, in the example of FIG. 20, the specific section A31 is an area where the state output units G21 and G22 do not exist. Therefore, the moving body 10A can pass through the specific section A31 without stopping. Such a specific section A31 corresponds to an expressway (or a motorway). As a result, the moving body 10A passing through the specific section A31 can reach the destination earlier than the moving body 10B traveling in the normal section A32.
 そこで、図20の例では、特定区間A31への進入と引き換えに、移動体10Aに対して、対価としてのペナルティが発生する。これにより、移動体10が無暗に特定区間A31を利用することを抑制でき、複数の移動体10間での公平を担保できる。また、反対に、特定区間A31への進入と引き換えに、移動体10Aに対して、対価としてインセンティブが発生してもよい。 Therefore, in the example of FIG. 20, in exchange for the entry into the specific section A31, a penalty is generated as a consideration for the moving body 10A. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving body 10 from silently using the specific section A31, and it is possible to ensure fairness among the plurality of moving bodies 10. On the contrary, an incentive may be generated as a consideration for the moving body 10A in exchange for the entry into the specific section A31.
 3つ目の例として、対価発生部55は、複数台の移動体10の各々について、エネルギの補給と引き換えに対価を発生する。具体的には、エネルギの補給を行う移動体10に対しては、対価発生部55は、対価としてペナルティを発生する。本実施形態では、移動体10は、蓄電池を備え、蓄電池に蓄積された電気エネルギを用いて動作する。そのため、移動体10に補給されるエネルギは、電気エネルギである。つまり、蓄電池の充電が、エネルギの補給に相当する。ここで、移動体10は、所定エリアA1内に設定されている充電スペースにおいて、いつでも蓄電池の充電が可能である。ただし、移動体10が無暗に充電スペースすることを抑制するため、エネルギの補給を行う移動体10については、エネルギの補給と引き換えに対価としてペナルティを課すことが好ましい。 As a third example, the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 in exchange for energy supply. Specifically, the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty as a consideration for the moving body 10 that replenishes energy. In the present embodiment, the mobile body 10 includes a storage battery and operates by using the electric energy stored in the storage battery. Therefore, the energy supplied to the moving body 10 is electric energy. That is, charging the storage battery corresponds to supplying energy. Here, the moving body 10 can charge the storage battery at any time in the charging space set in the predetermined area A1. However, in order to prevent the moving body 10 from charging the charging space indiscriminately, it is preferable that a penalty is imposed on the moving body 10 that replenishes energy in exchange for the replenishment of energy.
 4つ目の例として、対価発生部55は、複数台の移動体10の各々について、搬送する搬送対象物40に応じて対価を発生する。つまり、本実施形態では、上述したように、複数台の移動体10の各々は、搬送対象物40を搬送する搬送機能を有している。具体的には、搬送対象物40の大きさ及び重量等に応じて、対価発生部55は、対価としてのインセンティブ又はペナルティを発生する。要するに、搬送対象物40によって、その搬送を行う移動体10に掛かる負荷の大きさも異なり、場合によっては、移動体10の機会損失等につながる可能性もある。一例として、軽量物からなる搬送対象物40を搬送する移動体10には、対価としてペナルティを課し、重量物からなる搬送対象物40を搬送する移動体10には、対価としてインセンティブを支払う。 As a fourth example, the price generation unit 55 generates a price for each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 according to the transported object 40. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, each of the plurality of moving bodies 10 has the transfer function of transferring the transfer target object 40. Specifically, the consideration generation unit 55 generates an incentive or a penalty as consideration according to the size, weight, and the like of the object to be transported 40. In short, the magnitude of the load applied to the moving body 10 to be transported differs depending on the object to be transported 40, and in some cases, it may lead to opportunity loss of the moving body 10. As an example, a penalty is charged as a consideration for the moving body 10 that carries the carrying object 40 that is a lightweight object, and an incentive is paid as a consideration for the moving body 10 that carries the carrying object 40 that is a heavy object.
 (2.3.5)フローチャート
 図21は、上述した対価を発生するための動作を表すフローチャートである。
(2.3.5) Flowchart FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an operation for generating the above-mentioned consideration.
 図21に示すように、制御システム50は、まず取得部54にて、所定エリアA1における複数台の移動体10の動作に関する動作情報を取得する(S31)。そして、制御システム50は、取得した動作情報に基づいて、対価発生部55にて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかについてペナルティ条件を満たすか否かを判断する(S32)。ペナルティ条件は、対価としてのペナルティの発生対象となるために満たすべき条件である。つまり、協調制御が実行される場合に対象移動体であること、及び優先制御が実行される場合に優先移動体であること等が、ペナルティ条件に含まれる。ペナルティ条件を満たす場合(S32:Yes)、対価発生部55はペナルティを発生する(S33)。 As shown in FIG. 21, the control system 50 first acquires operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of mobile bodies 10 in a predetermined area A1 by the acquisition unit 54 (S31). Then, the control system 50 determines whether or not the penalty condition is satisfied for any of the plurality of mobile bodies 10 by the consideration generating unit 55 based on the acquired operation information (S32). Penalty conditions are conditions that must be met in order to be subject to a penalty as consideration. That is, the penalty condition includes, for example, the target moving body when the cooperative control is executed, the priority moving body when the priority control is executed, and the like. When the penalty condition is satisfied (S32: Yes), the consideration generating unit 55 generates a penalty (S33).
 一方、ペナルティ条件を満たさなければ(S32:No)、制御システム50は、取得した動作情報に基づいて、対価発生部55にて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかについてインセンティブ条件を満たすか否かを判断する(S34)。インセンティブ条件は、対価としてのインセンティブの発生対象となるために満たすべき条件である。つまり、協調制御が実行される場合に協力移動体であること、及び優先制御が実行される場合に優先移動体でないこと等が、インセンティブ条件に含まれる。インセンティブ条件を満たす場合(S34:Yes)、対価発生部55はインセンティブを発生する(S35)。 On the other hand, if the penalty condition is not satisfied (S32: No), the control system 50 causes the consideration generation unit 55 to satisfy the incentive condition for any of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the acquired operation information. Is determined (S34). The incentive conditions are the conditions that must be met in order to be eligible for incentives as consideration. In other words, the incentive conditions include that the mobile body is a cooperative mobile body when the cooperative control is executed, and that it is not the priority mobile body when the priority control is executed. When the incentive condition is satisfied (S34: Yes), the consideration generating unit 55 generates an incentive (S35).
 対価発生部55は、ペナルティを発生(S33)、又はインセンティブを発生(S35)すると、対価の更新を実行する(S36)。これにより、移動体10について、対価としてのペナルティ又はインセンティブが反映される。 The consideration generation unit 55 updates the consideration (S36) when a penalty is generated (S33) or an incentive is generated (S35). As a result, the penalty or incentive for the mobile unit 10 is reflected.
 対価の更新が完了するか、インセンティブ条件を満たさなければ(S34:No)、制御システム50は、対価を発生するための動作を終了する。制御システム50は、上記処理S31~S36を繰り返し実行する。 If the update of the consideration is completed or the incentive condition is not satisfied (S34: No), the control system 50 ends the operation for generating the consideration. The control system 50 repeatedly executes the processes S31 to S36.
 図21に示すフローチャートは、本実施形態に係る制御システム50の動作の一例に過ぎず、処理の順序が適宜変更されてもよいし、処理が適宜追加又は省略されてもよい。 The flowchart shown in FIG. 21 is merely an example of the operation of the control system 50 according to the present embodiment, and the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate.
 (2.4)変形例
 実施形態2は、本開示の様々な実施形態の一つに過ぎない。実施形態2は、本開示の目的を達成できれば、設計等に応じて種々の変更が可能である。また、制御システム50と同様の機能は、制御方法、(コンピュータ)プログラム、又はプログラムを記録した非一時的な記録媒体等で具現化されてもよい。一態様に係る制御方法は、所定エリアA1内を移動する複数台の移動体10を制御する制御方法であって、取得処理(図21の「S31」に相当)と、対価発生処理(図21の「S33」、「S35」に相当)と、を有する。取得処理は、所定エリアA1における複数台の移動体10の動作に関する動作情報を取得する処理である。対価発生処理は、取得処理で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体10のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する処理である。一態様に係るプログラムは、上記制御方法を、1以上のプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムである。
(2.4) Modified Example The second embodiment is only one of various embodiments of the present disclosure. The second embodiment can be variously modified according to the design and the like as long as the object of the present disclosure can be achieved. The same function as the control system 50 may be embodied by a control method, a (computer) program, a non-transitory recording medium recording the program, or the like. The control method according to one aspect is a control method for controlling a plurality of moving bodies 10 moving in a predetermined area A1, and is an acquisition process (corresponding to “S31” in FIG. 21) and a consideration generation process (FIG. 21). Corresponding to “S33” and “S35”). The acquisition process is a process of acquiring motion information regarding the motion of the plurality of mobile units 10 in the predetermined area A1. The consideration generating process is a process of generating a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies 10 based on the operation information obtained in the obtaining process. A program according to one aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method.
 以下、実施形態2の変形例を列挙する。以下に説明する変形例は、適宜組み合わせて適用可能である。 The following is a list of modifications of the second embodiment. The modifications described below can be applied in appropriate combination.
 本実施形態における制御システム50は、実施形態1と同様、コンピュータシステムを含んでいる。コンピュータシステムは、ハードウェアとしてのプロセッサ及びメモリを主構成とする。コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムをプロセッサが実行することによって、本実施形態における制御システム50としての機能が実現される。プログラムは、コンピュータシステムのメモリに予め記録されてもよく、電気通信回線を通じて提供されてもよく、コンピュータシステムで読み取り可能なメモリカード、光学ディスク、ハードディスクドライブ等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。 The control system 50 in the present embodiment includes a computer system as in the first embodiment. The computer system mainly comprises a processor as a hardware and a memory. When the processor executes the program recorded in the memory of the computer system, the function as the control system 50 in the present embodiment is realized. The program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. readable by the computer system. May be provided.
 また、制御システム50における複数の機能が、1つの筐体内に集約されていることは制御システム50に必須の構成ではなく、制御システム50の構成要素は、複数の筐体に分散して設けられていてもよい。下位システム21Aは移動体10と別体であってもよい。さらに、制御システム50の少なくとも一部の機能、例えば、状態制御部53の一部の機能がクラウド(クラウドコンピューティング)等によって実現されてもよい。

 また、実施形態2では、協調制御において、協力移動体を移動させる場合を例示したが、協調制御はこのような制御に限らない。例えば、協調制御においては、協力移動体を路肩に停止させることで、対象移動体の進路を確保してもよい。
Further, it is not an essential configuration of the control system 50 that a plurality of functions in the control system 50 are integrated in one housing, and the constituent elements of the control system 50 are distributed and provided in the plurality of housings. May be. The lower system 21A may be separate from the mobile unit 10. Furthermore, at least a part of the function of the control system 50, for example, a part of the function of the state control unit 53 may be realized by a cloud (cloud computing) or the like.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the cooperative control, the case where the cooperative moving body is moved is illustrated, but the cooperative control is not limited to such control. For example, in cooperative control, the course of the target moving body may be secured by stopping the cooperative moving body on the shoulder of the road.
 (実施形態3)
 本実施形態に係る制御システム50Aは、図22に示すように、状態制御部53(図15参照)を備えない点で、実施形態2に係る制御システム50と相違する。以下、実施形態2と同様の構成については、共通の符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。
(Embodiment 3)
As shown in FIG. 22, the control system 50A according to the present embodiment is different from the control system 50 according to the second embodiment in that it does not include the state control unit 53 (see FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the same components as those in the second embodiment will be designated by the common reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
 本実施形態では、通行制御モジュールM1(区域Z1及び状態出力部G1を含む)が存在しない。そのため、下位システム21Aには、状態情報取得部24(図15参照)が存在しない。 In this embodiment, the traffic control module M1 (including the area Z1 and the state output unit G1) does not exist. Therefore, the state information acquisition unit 24 (see FIG. 15) does not exist in the lower system 21A.
 また、本実施形態に係る制御システム50Aは、上位システム51Aに作業生成部57を有している。作業生成部57は、移動体10に実行させる作業の内容に関する作業情報を生成する。 Further, the control system 50A according to the present embodiment has the work generation unit 57 in the upper system 51A. The work generation unit 57 generates work information regarding the content of the work to be executed by the moving body 10.
 本実施形態では、上位システム51Aは、下位システム21Aから出力された要求(作業要求)に対して、許可を与えるか否かを判定する。下位システム21Aは、要求(作業要求)について許可が与えられた場合に、要求に対応する作業を配下の移動体10に実行させる。作業要求は、要求生成部25にて生成される。 In this embodiment, the upper system 51A determines whether or not to grant permission to the request (work request) output from the lower system 21A. When the permission is given to the request (work request), the lower system 21A causes the subordinate mobile unit 10 to perform the work corresponding to the request. The work request is generated by the request generation unit 25.
 さらに、下位システム21Aは、上位システム51Aで生成された作業情報に対応する形で要求を出力することによって、この作業情報で規定される「作業」に対応する要求を出力する。また、下位システム21Aは、要求について許可が与えられた場合に、要求に対応する作業の内容に関する指示情報を出力するように構成されている。そのため、移動体10は、下位システム21Aから出力された指示情報で規定される「作業」を実行することによって、許可が与えられた要求(作業要求)に対応する作業を実行することができる。 Further, the lower system 21A outputs a request corresponding to the "work" specified by this work information by outputting the request in a form corresponding to the work information generated by the higher system 51A. Further, the lower system 21A is configured to output the instruction information regarding the content of the work corresponding to the request when the permission is given to the request. Therefore, the mobile body 10 can execute the work corresponding to the request (work request) for which the permission is given by executing the "work" defined by the instruction information output from the lower system 21A.
 また、本実施形態に係る制御システム50Aは、指令システム80と通信可能に構成されていてもよい。指令システム80は、上位システム51A及び下位システム21Aの各々と同様に、メモリ及びプロセッサを含むコンピュータシステムを主構成とする。指令システム80は、制御システム50Aに対して作業命令を出力する。制御システム50Aは、指令システム80から作業命令を受信すると、作業命令に基づいて、作業情報を生成する。本実施形態では、制御システム50Aは、1つの作業命令に基づいて、1つの作業命令を実現するための作業情報を複数生成する。 Further, the control system 50A according to the present embodiment may be configured to be communicable with the command system 80. The command system 80 is mainly composed of a computer system including a memory and a processor, like the upper system 51A and the lower system 21A. The command system 80 outputs a work command to the control system 50A. Upon receiving the work order from the command system 80, the control system 50A generates work information based on the work order. In the present embodiment, the control system 50A generates a plurality of work information for realizing one work command based on one work command.
 そのため、本実施形態に係る制御システム50Aによれば、上位システム51Aが1つの作業命令を受けると、上位システム51Aにて、作業の内容に関する作業情報が複数生成される。下位システム21Aにおいては、これら複数の作業情報の各々で規定される作業に対応させて要求(作業要求)を出力可能となる。そして、複数の作業情報の全てに対応する要求に対して、上位システム51Aが許可を与えることで、移動体10は、複数の作業情報で規定される全ての作業を実行可能となり、1つの作業命令が遂行される。 Therefore, according to the control system 50A according to the present embodiment, when the host system 51A receives one work command, the host system 51A generates a plurality of work information related to the contents of the work. In the lower system 21A, a request (work request) can be output corresponding to the work specified by each of the plurality of work information. Then, when the host system 51A gives permission to the request corresponding to all of the plurality of work information, the moving body 10 can execute all the work defined by the plurality of work information, and one work. The order is fulfilled.
 ところで、本実施形態に係る制御システム50Aは、移動体10が作業を実行した場合には、実行した作業に対する対価としてのインセンティブを対価発生部55にて発生する。これにより、下位システム21A又は移動体10においては、作業を実行するモチベーション(動機付け)が与えられることになる。インセンティブが発生する場合には、下位システム21Aは、要求(作業要求)に対して許可が与えられ、配下の移動体10に作業を実行させたときに、この作業によって得られるインセンティブに関する情報、又は作業の実績である「作業点数」を保持する機能を有していてもよい。 By the way, in the control system 50A according to the present embodiment, when the moving body 10 executes the work, the consideration generating unit 55 generates an incentive as a consideration for the executed work. As a result, the lower system 21A or the mobile body 10 is given motivation to perform the work. When an incentive is generated, the lower system 21A is given permission for a request (work request), and when the subordinate mobile body 10 is caused to perform the work, information about the incentive obtained by this work, or It may have a function of holding the "number of work points" which is the actual work record.
 さらに、インセンティブが発生する場合において、インセンティブの大きさは、作業ごとに決定されることが好ましい。本開示でいう「インセンティブの大きさ」は、インセンティブとして給付される対価の大きさを意味し、例えば、インセンティブが金銭であれば、インセンティブの大きさが大きくなるほどに、金銭の額(金額)が高くなる。すなわち、全ての作業について一律のインセンティブが発生するのではなく、作業によって、インセンティブの大きさを異ならせることが可能である。 Furthermore, when incentives occur, the size of the incentives is preferably determined for each work. The “magnitude of incentive” in the present disclosure means the amount of consideration paid as an incentive.For example, if the incentive is money, the amount of money (amount) increases as the magnitude of the incentive increases. Get higher That is, it is possible not to generate a uniform incentive for all work but to make the size of the incentive different depending on the work.
 この場合において、作業の優先度が、インセンティブの大きさに反映されることが好ましい。つまり、インセンティブの大きさは、作業ごとの優先度によって決定される。このとき、優先度が高い作業ほど、インセンティブの大きさが大きくなる。これにより、特定の作業への要求(作業要求)の集中を緩和し、制御システム50全体として効率的な運用を図ることが可能である。一例として、急を要する作業及びハイリスクな作業等について、他の作業よりも優先度を高く設定することにより、このような作業に対する要求を集めやすくなる。 In this case, it is preferable that the priority of the work is reflected in the size of the incentive. In other words, the size of the incentive is determined by the priority of each work. At this time, the higher the priority, the greater the incentive. As a result, it is possible to reduce the concentration of requests for specific work (work requests), and to efficiently operate the control system 50 as a whole. As an example, by setting the priority of urgent work, high-risk work, and the like to be higher than that of other works, it becomes easier to collect requests for such work.
 また、インセンティブの大きさが作業ごとに決定される場合において、インセンティブの大きさは、作業の優先度に代えて、又は優先度と共に、例えば、作業の実行にかかる負担である「作業負担」を反映してもよい。本開示でいう「作業負担」は、作業の種類、作業の実行に必要な能力(積載重量等)及び作業の実行に必要な時間(所要時間)等の少なくとも1つを含む。一例として、所要時間については、所要時間が長い作業ほど作業負担が大きくなり、インセンティブの大きさが大きくなる。 In addition, when the size of the incentive is determined for each work, the size of the incentive may be, instead of or together with the priority of the work, for example, a “work burden” that is a burden of performing the work. May be reflected. The "work load" referred to in the present disclosure includes at least one of the type of work, the capacity required to execute the work (loading weight, etc.), the time required to execute the work (required time), and the like. As an example, regarding the required time, the longer the required time, the greater the work burden and the greater the incentive.
 ただし、通行制御モジュールM1(区域Z1及び状態出力部G1を含む)が存在しないことは、実施形態3に係る制御システム50Aに必須の構成ではない。通行制御モジュールM1が存在する場合でも、制御システム50Aは、状態制御部53を備えないので、通行制御モジュールM1における状態出力部G1の制御(優先制御等)を実行する機能がない。 However, the absence of the traffic control module M1 (including the area Z1 and the state output unit G1) is not an essential configuration for the control system 50A according to the third embodiment. Even if the traffic control module M1 is present, the control system 50A does not include the state control unit 53, and therefore does not have the function of executing the control (priority control or the like) of the state output unit G1 in the traffic control module M1.
 実施形態3で説明した種々の構成(変形例を含む)は、実施形態1又は2で説明した種々の構成(変形例を含む)と適宜組み合わせて採用可能である。 The various configurations (including the modified examples) described in the third embodiment can be appropriately combined with the various configurations (including the modified examples) described in the first or second embodiment.
 (まとめ)
 以上説明したように、第1の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)は、通行制御モジュール(M1)を用いて移動体(10)の通行を制御する。通行制御モジュール(M1)は、移動体(10)が移動する所定エリア(A1)の一部に設定される区域(Z1)と、区域(Z1)に対応して設けられる状態出力部(G1)と、を含む。状態出力部(G1)は、第1方向(D1)及び第2方向(D2)の少なくとも一方で、移動体(10)の通行を許可する許可状態であるか移動体(10)の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力する。第1方向(D1)は、移動体(10)が区域(Z1)の外部から内部に移動する方向であり、第2方向(D2)は、移動体(10)が区域(Z1)の内部から外部に移動する方向である。
(Summary)
As described above, the control system (50, 50A) according to the first aspect controls the passage of the moving body (10) using the passage control module (M1). The traffic control module (M1) includes an area (Z1) set as a part of a predetermined area (A1) on which the moving body (10) moves, and a state output unit (G1) provided corresponding to the area (Z1). And, including. The state output unit (G1) is in a permitted state that allows the moving body (10) to pass in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or does not allow the moving body (10) to pass. The status information indicating whether the status is permitted or not is output. The first direction (D1) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1), and the second direction (D2) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the inside of the area (Z1). This is the direction to move to the outside.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)の円滑な通行を実現可能な制御システム(50,50A)を提供することができる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to provide the control system (50, 50A) capable of realizing smooth passage of the moving body (10).
 第2の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1の態様において、状態出力部(G1)によって、第1方向(D1)及び第2方向(D2)のうちの一方で、状態情報が出力される。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the second aspect, in the first aspect, one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2) by the state output unit (G1), the state information Is output.
 この態様によれば、第1方向(D1)及び第2方向(D2)のうちの一方で、移動体(10)の通行を制御できる。 According to this aspect, the passage of the moving body (10) can be controlled in one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2).
 第3の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1又は第2の態様において、通行制御モジュール(M1)は、区域(Z1)につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部(G1)を含む。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the third aspect, in the first or second aspect, a plurality of passage control modules (M1) are provided corresponding to a plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1), respectively. Includes the state output unit (G1) of.
 この態様によれば、複数の通路と区域(Z1)との間の通行をそれぞれ制御することができる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to control the traffic between the plurality of passages and the zone (Z1).
 第4の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1~第3のいずれかの態様において、状態情報が示す状態を許可状態と不許可状態とのいずれかに制御する状態制御部(53)を、更に備える。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the fourth aspect, in any one of the first to third aspects, a state control unit (a state control unit that controls the state indicated by the state information to either a permitted state or a disallowed state). 53) is further provided.
 この態様によれば、状態制御部(53)は、状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を変化させることができるので、より円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, since the state control unit (53) can change the state determined by the state output unit (G1), smoother traffic can be realized.
 第5の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第4の態様において、状態制御部(53)は、1又は複数の通行制御モジュール(M1)が含む複数の状態出力部(G1)の各々について、状態情報が示す状態が、許可状態であるか不許可状態であるかを制御する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the fifth aspect, in the fourth aspect, the state control unit (53) includes a plurality of state output units (G1) included in one or more traffic control modules (M1). For each of them, it controls whether the state indicated by the state information is a permitted state or a non-permitted state.
 この態様によれば、複数の状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を連動して制御することで、より円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, smoother traffic can be realized by controlling the states determined by the plurality of state output units (G1) in conjunction with each other.
 第6の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第4の態様において、通行制御モジュール(M1)は、区域(Z1)につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部(G1)を含む。状態制御部(53)は、複数の状態出力部(G1)のうちの一つによって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御する場合、複数の状態出力部(G1)のうち残りの状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を不許可状態に制御する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the sixth aspect, in the fourth aspect, the traffic control module (M1) has a plurality of status outputs provided respectively corresponding to the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1). Includes part (G1). When the state control unit (53) controls the state indicated by the state information output by one of the plurality of state output units (G1) to the permitted state, the remaining state output unit (G1) remains. The state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) is controlled to be an unauthorized state.
 この態様によれば、状態制御部(53)により、区域(Z1)につながる複数の通路のうちの1つを通行可能な状態とすることで、複数の通路の通行を整理して、円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, the state control unit (53) makes it possible to pass one of the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1), so that the passage of the plurality of passages can be arranged smoothly. Passing can be realized.
 第7の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第4の態様において、通行制御モジュール(M1)は、区域(Z1)につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の状態出力部(G1)を含む。状態制御部(53)は、複数の状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を全て不許可状態とした第1時点から所定の待機時間が経過した後の第2時点で、複数の状態出力部(G1)のうち切替対象の状態出力部(G1)によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を許可状態に制御する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the seventh aspect, in the fourth aspect, the traffic control module (M1) is provided with a plurality of status outputs provided respectively corresponding to the plurality of passages connected to the zone (Z1). Includes part (G1). The state control unit (53), at a second time point after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the first time point when all the states indicated by the state information output by the plurality of state output sections (G1) are set to the non-permission state, The state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) to be switched among the plurality of state output units (G1) is controlled to be the permitted state.
 この態様によれば、複数の状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を全て不許可状態として、複数の通路と区域(Z1)との間の通行を遮断した後に、切替対象の状態出力部(G1)を許可状態に制御するので、より円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, all the states determined by the plurality of state output units (G1) are set to the non-permission state, and after the passage between the plurality of passages and the zone (Z1) is blocked, the state output unit to be switched ( Since G1) is controlled to the permitted state, smoother passage can be realized.
 第8の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第4~第7のいずれかの態様において、状態制御部(53)は、移動体(10)が移動する目的に応じて、状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を制御する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the eighth aspect, in any of the fourth to seventh aspects, the state control unit (53) outputs a state according to the purpose for which the moving body (10) moves. The state indicated by the state information output by the section (G1) is controlled.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)が移動する目的に応じて、状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を許可状態及び不許可状態にいずれかに制御できる。 According to this aspect, the state determined by the state output unit (G1) can be controlled to either the permitted state or the unpermitted state according to the purpose of the moving body (10) to move.
 第9の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第4~第8のいずれかの態様において、区域(Z1)の内部に移動体(10)が存在するか否かを検知する検知部(52)を更に備える。状態制御部(53)は、状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を、検知部(52)の検知結果に応じて制御する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the ninth aspect, in any one of the fourth to eighth aspects, a detection unit that detects whether or not a moving body (10) exists inside the area (Z1). (52) is further provided. The state control unit (53) controls the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) according to the detection result of the detection unit (52).
 この態様によれば、状態制御部(53)は、検知部(52)の検知結果に基づいて状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を制御する。例えば、区域(Z1)の内部に移動体(10)が存在する場合は状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態を不許可状態とすることで、区域(Z1)の外部から内部へ他の移動体(10)が移動するのを抑制でき、円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, the state control unit (53) controls the state determined by the state output unit (G1) based on the detection result of the detection unit (52). For example, when the moving body (10) exists inside the zone (Z1), the state determined by the state output unit (G1) is set to the non-permission state, so that another movement from the outside to the inside of the zone (Z1) is performed. It is possible to suppress the movement of the body (10) and realize smooth passage.
 第10の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1~第9のいずれかの態様において、移動体(10)は、状態出力部(G1)が設けられる位置の手前の確認位置で状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を確認した結果に基づいて通行又は停止する。確認位置は、移動体(10)の状態に応じて変化する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the tenth aspect, in any one of the first to ninth aspects, the moving body (10) is at a confirmation position before the position where the status output unit (G1) is provided. Based on the result of confirming the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1), the vehicle passes or stops. The confirmation position changes according to the state of the moving body (10).
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)が、状態出力部(G1)が決定する状態に基づいて停止すると決定した場合に、停止位置で停止できるように確認位置を変化させることができる。 According to this aspect, when the moving body (10) decides to stop based on the state determined by the state output unit (G1), the confirmation position can be changed so that the moving body (10) can stop at the stop position.
 第11の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1~第10のいずれかの態様において、所定エリア(A1)において移動体(10)が移動する経路に沿って複数の区域(Z1)が設けられる。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the eleventh aspect, in any one of the first to tenth aspects, a plurality of zones (Z1 are provided along a route along which the moving body (10) moves in the predetermined area (A1). ) Is provided.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)が移動する経路に沿って複数の区域(Z1)を設けることで、移動体(10)の通行を円滑に制御することができる。 According to this aspect, the passage of the mobile body (10) can be smoothly controlled by providing the plurality of zones (Z1) along the route along which the mobile body (10) moves.
 第12の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)は、第4の態様において、取得部(54)と、対価発生部(55)と、を備える。取得部(54)は、所定エリア(A1)における複数台の移動体(10)の動作に関する動作情報を取得する。対価発生部(55)は、取得部(54)で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体(10)のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する。制御システム(50,50A)は、所定エリア(A1)内を移動する複数台の移動体(10)を制御する。 The control system (50, 50A) according to the twelfth aspect includes the acquisition section (54) and the consideration generation section (55) in the fourth aspect. The acquisition unit (54) acquires operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of moving bodies (10) in the predetermined area (A1). The consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies (10) based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit (54). The control system (50, 50A) controls a plurality of moving bodies (10) that move within the predetermined area (A1).
 この態様によれば、複数台の移動体(10)の動作に関する動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体(10)のいずれかに対する対価が発生する。そのため、移動体(10)においては、ある特定の動作をすることについてモチベーションが与えられる。例えば、複数台の移動体(10)の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得るような場合に、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作について、対価としてインセンティブが発生することとする。そうすると、干渉を生じ得る移動体(10)のうち少なくとも1つにあっては、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作を積極的に採用することで、経路の変更を含む動作が特定の移動体(10)に集中しにくくなる。結果的に、複数台の移動体(10)間で作業効率の不平等が生じにくい、という利点がある。 According to this aspect, based on the operation information regarding the operation of the plurality of moving bodies (10), a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第13の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第12の態様において、状態制御部(53)は、複数台の移動体(10)のうちの1台である優先移動体(10)の進路上の状態出力部(G1)が出力する状態情報が示す状態を優先的に許可状態とする優先制御を実行する。対価発生部(55)は、優先制御が実行される場合に、優先移動体(10)に対する対価としてペナルティを発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the thirteenth aspect, in the twelfth aspect, the state control unit (53) is a priority moving body (10) which is one of a plurality of moving bodies (10). Priority control is executed in which the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) on the path of is preferentially permitted. The consideration generation unit (55) generates a penalty as a consideration for the priority moving body (10) when the priority control is executed.
 この態様によれば、優先移動体(10)と他の移動体(10)との間で不平等が生じ得る優先制御の実行に際して、優先移動体(10)に対価が発生するので、優先移動体(10)と他の移動体(10)との間の作業効率の不平等が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, when the priority control is performed in which inequality may occur between the priority mobile unit (10) and another mobile unit (10), the priority mobile unit (10) is charged a value. Inequalities in work efficiency between the body (10) and other moving bodies (10) are less likely to occur.
 第14の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第12又は13の態様において、対価発生部(55)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々について、状態情報の遵守状況に応じて対価を発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the fourteenth aspect, in the twelfth or thirteenth aspect, the consideration generating unit (55) determines whether or not the plurality of mobile bodies (10) comply with the status information. Generate compensation.
 この態様によれば、複数台の移動体(10)に対して状態情報の遵守するようなモチベーションを与えることができ、複数台の移動体(10)のより円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to give motivation for observing the state information to a plurality of moving bodies (10), and it is possible to realize smoother passage of the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第15の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第12~14のいずれかの態様において、所定エリア(A1)は特定区間(A31)を含む。対価発生部(55)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々について、特定区間(A31)への進入と引き換えに対価を発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the fifteenth aspect, in any one of the twelfth to fourteenth aspects, the predetermined area (A1) includes the specific section (A31). The consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration for each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) in exchange for entry into the specific section (A31).
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)が無暗に特定区間(A31)を利用することを抑制でき、複数の移動体(10)間で不公平が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the moving body (10) from using the specific section (A31) unobtrusively, and unfairness is less likely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第16の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第12~15のいずれかの態様において、対価発生部(55)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々について、エネルギの補給と引き換えに対価を発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the sixteenth aspect, in any one of the twelfth to fifteenth aspects, the consideration generating unit (55) supplies energy to each of the plurality of moving bodies (10). In exchange, you will be charged.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)が無暗にエネルギの補給を行うことを抑制でき、複数の移動体(10)間で不公平が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the moving body (10) from supplying the energy indiscriminately, and it becomes difficult to cause unfairness among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第17の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第12~16のいずれかの態様において、複数台の移動体(10)の各々は、搬送対象物(40)を搬送する搬送機能を有する。対価発生部(55)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々について、搬送する搬送対象物(40)に応じて対価を発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the seventeenth aspect, in any one of the twelfth to sixteenth aspects, each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) has a transport function for transporting the transport object (40). Have. The consideration generation unit (55) generates a consideration for each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) according to the object (40) to be conveyed.
 この態様によれば、搬送対象物(40)に起因した、複数台の移動体(10)間での不平等が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, inequalities between the plurality of moving bodies (10) due to the transfer target (40) are less likely to occur.
 第18の態様に係る制御方法は、第1の設定処理と、第2の設定処理と、制御処理とを含む。第1の設定処理は、移動体(10)が移動する所定エリア(A1)の一部に区域(Z1)を設定する処理である。第2の設定処理は、区域(Z1)に対応して状態出力部(G1)を設ける処理である。状態出力部(G1)は、第1方向(D1)、及び、第2方向(D2)の少なくとも一方で、移動体(10)の通行を許可する許可状態であるか移動体(10)の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力する。第1方向(D1)は、移動体(10)が区域(Z1)の外部から内部に移動する方向である。第2方向(D2)は、移動体(10)が区域(Z1)の内部から外部に移動する方向である。制御処理では、状態出力部(G1)によって出力される状態情報が示す状態を許可状態又は不許可状態に制御する。 The control method according to the eighteenth aspect includes a first setting process, a second setting process, and a control process. The first setting process is a process of setting the zone (Z1) in a part of the predetermined area (A1) in which the moving body (10) moves. The second setting process is a process of providing the state output unit (G1) corresponding to the zone (Z1). The state output unit (G1) is in a permission state permitting passage of the moving body (10) in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or the passage of the moving body (10). Outputs status information indicating whether or not the status is disallowed. The first direction (D1) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1). The second direction (D2) is the direction in which the moving body (10) moves from the inside to the outside of the area (Z1). In the control process, the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit (G1) is controlled to a permitted state or a disallowed state.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)の円滑な通行を実現可能な制御システム(50,50A)の制御方法を提供することができる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to provide a control method of the control system (50, 50A) capable of realizing smooth passage of the mobile body (10).
 第19の態様に係る制御方法は、第18の態様において、取得処理と、対価発生処理と、を更に有する。取得処理は、所定エリア(A1)における複数台の移動体(10)の動作に関する動作情報を取得する処理である。対価発生処理は、取得処理で取得した動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体(10)のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する処理である。この制御方法では、所定エリア(A1)内を移動する複数台の移動体(10)を制御する。 The control method according to the nineteenth aspect further includes an acquisition process and a consideration generation process in the eighteenth aspect. The acquisition process is a process for acquiring operation information regarding the operation of a plurality of moving bodies (10) in a predetermined area (A1). The consideration generating process is a process of generating a consideration including at least one of an incentive and a penalty for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10) based on the operation information acquired in the acquisition process. In this control method, a plurality of moving bodies (10) moving in the predetermined area (A1) are controlled.
 この態様によれば、複数台の移動体(10)の動作に関する動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体(10)のいずれかに対する対価が発生する。そのため、移動体(10)においては、ある特定の動作をすることについてモチベーションが与えられる。例えば、複数台の移動体(10)の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得るような場合に、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作について、対価としてインセンティブが発生することとする。そうすると、干渉を生じ得る移動体(10)のうち少なくとも1つにあっては、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作を積極的に採用することで、経路の変更を含む動作が特定の移動体(10)に集中しにくくなる。結果的に、複数台の移動体(10)間で作業効率の不平等が生じにくい、という利点がある。 According to this aspect, based on the operation information regarding the operation of the plurality of moving bodies (10), a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第20の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)は、第12の態様において、協調制御部(56)を更に備える。協調制御部(56)は、複数台の移動体(10)のうちの1台の移動体(10)を対象移動体(10)とし、複数台の移動体(10)のうち対象移動体(10)以外の協力移動体(10)を制御することで、対象移動体(10)の進路を確保する協調制御を実行する。対価発生部(55)は、協調制御が実行される場合に、対象移動体(10)と協力移動体(10)との少なくとも一方に対する対価を発生する。 The control system (50, 50A) according to the twentieth aspect further includes a coordination control section (56) in the twelfth aspect. The cooperative control unit (56) sets one moving body (10) among the plurality of moving bodies (10) as the target moving body (10), and the target moving body (10) among the plurality of moving bodies (10). By controlling the cooperative mobile body (10) other than 10), the cooperative control for securing the course of the target mobile body (10) is executed. The consideration generator (55) generates a consideration for at least one of the target moving body (10) and the cooperative moving body (10) when cooperative control is executed.
 この態様によれば、対象移動体(10)と協力移動体(10)との間で不平等が生じ得る協調制御の実行に際して、対象移動体(10)と協力移動体(10)との少なくとも一方に対価が発生するので、両者間の作業効率の不平等が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, at least of the target mobile body (10) and the cooperative mobile body (10) in executing the cooperative control in which inequality may occur between the target mobile body (10) and the cooperative mobile body (10). Since compensation is incurred on one side, inequality in work efficiency between the two is less likely to occur.
 第21の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20の態様において、対価発生部(55)は、協調制御が実行される場合に、対象移動体(10)に対して対価としてペナルティを発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 21st aspect, in the 20th aspect, the consideration generating unit (55) penalizes the target moving body (10) as a consideration when the cooperative control is executed. To occur.
 この態様によれば、対象移動体(10)についてはペナルティを課すことで、移動体(10)が無暗に対象移動体(10)として協調制御を利用することを抑制できる。 According to this aspect, by imposing a penalty on the target moving body (10), it is possible to suppress the moving body (10) from using the cooperative control as the target moving body (10) without any darkness.
 第22の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20又は21の態様において、対価発生部(55)は、協調制御が実行される場合に、協力移動体(10)に対して対価としてインセンティブを発生する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 22nd aspect, in the 20th or 21st aspect, the consideration generating unit (55) pays for the cooperative mobile body (10) when the cooperative control is executed. As an incentive to generate.
 この態様によれば、協力移動体(10)に対してインセンティブが発生することで、協力移動体(10)における協調制御による不利益の補填を図ることが可能である。 According to this aspect, by generating an incentive for the cooperative mobile body (10), it is possible to compensate for a disadvantage due to cooperative control in the cooperative mobile body (10).
 第23の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20~22のいずれかの態様において、協調制御部(56)は、対象移動体(10)からの要求に応じて、協調制御を実行する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 23rd aspect, in any of the 20th to 22nd aspects, the cooperative control unit (56) performs cooperative control in response to a request from the target mobile body (10). Execute.
 この態様によれば、対象移動体(10)が他の移動体(10)に協力移動体(10)として移動を要請する必要が生じた場合に、対象移動体(10)の判断で、対象移動体(10)から要求を出すことで協調制御を実行することが可能となる。 According to this aspect, when it becomes necessary for the target moving body (10) to request another moving body (10) to move as a cooperative moving body (10), the target moving body (10) determines the target. By issuing a request from the moving body (10), it becomes possible to execute cooperative control.
 第24の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20~23のいずれかの態様において、協調制御部(56)は、以下の移動体(10)を協力移動体(10)とする。つまり、協調制御部(56)は、複数台の移動体(10)のうち、所定エリア(A1)における対象移動体(10)の進路に関連する領域に存在する移動体(10)のみを協力移動体(10)とする。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 24th aspect, in any one of the 20th to 23rd aspects, the cooperative control unit (56) uses the following mobile body (10) as the cooperative mobile body (10). .. That is, the cooperative control unit (56) cooperates only with the moving body (10) existing in the area related to the course of the target moving body (10) in the predetermined area (A1) among the plurality of moving bodies (10). Let it be a moving body (10).
 この態様によれば、対象移動体(10)の進路に関連する領域に存在する移動体(10)に絞って、協力移動体(10)とすることで、無関係な移動体(10)に協調制御を強いることを回避可能となる。 According to this aspect, by focusing on the moving body (10) existing in the region related to the course of the target moving body (10) and making it a cooperative moving body (10), it cooperates with the unrelated moving body (10). It becomes possible to avoid forcing control.
 第25の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20~24のいずれかの態様において、協調制御部(56)は、対象移動体(10)の進路上に位置する協力移動体(10)を移動させることで、対象移動体(10)の進路を確保する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 25th aspect, in any one of the 20th to 24th aspects, the cooperative control unit (56) is a cooperative moving body (56) located on the path of the target moving body (10). By moving 10), the course of the target moving body (10) is secured.
 この態様によれば、協力移動体(10)が、対象移動体(10)に道を譲ることにより、対象移動体(10)の進路が確保され、対象移動体(10)が進路上を移動可能となる。 According to this aspect, the cooperative moving body (10) gives way to the target moving body (10), so that the course of the target moving body (10) is secured, and the target moving body (10) moves on the course. It will be possible.
 第26の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第25の態様において、協調制御部(56)は、対象移動体(10)の進路を確保して対象移動体(10)の移動が完了した後に、協力移動体(10)を協調制御の前の位置に移動させる。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 26th aspect, in the 25th aspect, the cooperative control unit (56) secures the course of the target moving body (10) and moves the target moving body (10). After completion, the cooperating mobile body (10) is moved to the position before the cooperative control.
 この態様によれば、協調制御に際して協力移動体(10)が移動することによる協力移動体(10)の不利益が生じにくくなる。 According to this aspect, the disadvantage of the cooperative moving body (10) due to the movement of the cooperative moving body (10) during the cooperative control is unlikely to occur.
 第27の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第20~26のいずれかの態様において、協調制御部(56)は、協調制御に際して対象移動体(10)の周囲に報知する。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the 27th aspect, in any of the 20th to 26th aspects, the cooperative control unit (56) notifies the surroundings of the target moving body (10) during cooperative control.
 この態様によれば、例えば、対象移動体(10)の進路上に、障害物が放置されているような場合等において、対象移動体(10)の周囲の人に、障害物の撤去を促すことが可能である。 According to this aspect, for example, when an obstacle is left in the path of the target moving body (10), the person around the target moving body (10) is urged to remove the obstacle. It is possible.
 第28の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)は、第20~27のいずれかの態様において、状態出力部(G1)について、状態情報が示す状態を制御する状態制御部(53)を更に備える。状態出力部(G1)は、所定エリア(A1)の一部に設定される区域(Z1)に対応して設けられる。状態出力部(G1)は、第1方向(D1)、及び、第2方向(D2)の少なくとも一方で、複数台の移動体(10)の各々の通行を許可する許可状態であるか通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力する。第1方向(D1)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々が区域(Z1)の外部から内部に移動する方向である。第2方向(D2)は、複数台の移動体(10)の各々が区域(Z1)の内部から外部に移動する方向である。 The control system (50, 50A) according to the twenty-eighth aspect is the control system (50, 50A) according to any one of the twentieth to twenty-seventh aspects, further including a state control section (53) for controlling the state indicated by the state information with respect to the state output section (G1). Prepare The state output unit (G1) is provided corresponding to an area (Z1) set as a part of a predetermined area (A1). The state output unit (G1) is in a permitted state permitting passage of each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) in at least one of the first direction (D1) and the second direction (D2), or the passage is permitted. The status information indicating whether or not the status is the unauthorized status is output. The first direction (D1) is a direction in which each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) moves from the outside to the inside of the area (Z1). The second direction (D2) is a direction in which each of the plurality of moving bodies (10) moves from the inside to the outside of the area (Z1).
 この態様によれば、状態出力部(G1)が出力する状態情報の状態を変化させることで、複数台の移動体(10)の円滑な通行を実現できる。 According to this aspect, by changing the state of the state information output by the state output unit (G1), smooth passage of the plurality of mobile bodies (10) can be realized.
 第29の態様に係るプログラムは、第18の態様に係る制御方法を、1以上のプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムである。 The program according to the twenty-ninth aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method according to the eighteenth aspect.
 この態様によれば、移動体(10)の円滑な通行を実現可能なプログラムを提供することができる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to provide a program capable of realizing smooth passage of the mobile body (10).
 第30の態様に係るプログラムは、第19の態様に係る制御方法を、1以上のプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムである。 The program according to the thirtieth aspect is a program for causing one or more processors to execute the control method according to the nineteenth aspect.
 この態様によれば、複数台の移動体(10)の動作に関する動作情報に基づいて、複数台の移動体(10)のいずれかに対する対価が発生する。そのため、移動体(10)においては、ある特定の動作をすることについてモチベーションが与えられる。例えば、複数台の移動体(10)の間で互いの移動に干渉が生じ得るような場合に、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作について、対価としてインセンティブが発生することとする。そうすると、干渉を生じ得る移動体(10)のうち少なくとも1つにあっては、干渉を回避するような経路の変更を含む動作を積極的に採用することで、経路の変更を含む動作が特定の移動体(10)に集中しにくくなる。結果的に、複数台の移動体(10)間で作業効率の不平等が生じにくい、という利点がある。 According to this aspect, based on the operation information regarding the operation of the plurality of moving bodies (10), a consideration is generated for any of the plurality of moving bodies (10). Therefore, the moving body (10) is motivated to perform a certain specific operation. For example, when interference may occur in the movement of a plurality of moving bodies (10), an incentive is generated as a consideration for an operation including a route change for avoiding the interference. Then, in at least one of the moving bodies (10) that can cause interference, the operation including the route change can be specified by positively adopting the operation including the route change so as to avoid the interference. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the moving body (10). As a result, there is an advantage that unevenness in work efficiency is unlikely to occur among the plurality of moving bodies (10).
 第31の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第10の態様において、移動体(10)の状態は、移動体(10)の速度と重量との少なくとも一方を含む。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the thirty-first aspect, in the tenth aspect, the state of the moving body (10) includes at least one of the speed and the weight of the moving body (10).
 第32の態様に係る制御システム(50,50A)では、第1~第10、第30、及び第31のいずれかの態様において、移動体(10)は、物体を搬送する搬送装置を含む。 In the control system (50, 50A) according to the thirty-second aspect, in any one of the first to tenth, thirtieth, and thirty-first aspects, the moving body (10) includes a carrying device that carries an object.
 上記態様に限らず、実施形態に係る制御システム(50,50A)の種々の構成(変形例を含む)は、制御システム(50,50A)の制御方法、(コンピュータ)プログラム、又はプログラムを記録した非一時的記録媒体等で具現化可能である。 Not limited to the above aspects, various configurations (including modifications) of the control system (50, 50A) according to the embodiment record the control method, (computer) program, or program of the control system (50, 50A). It can be embodied in a non-transitory recording medium or the like.
 第2~第17、第20~第28、及び第31~第32の態様に係る構成については、制御システム(50、50A)に必須の構成ではなく、適宜省略可能である。 The configurations according to the second to 17th, 20th to 28th, and 31st to 32nd aspects are not essential configurations for the control system (50, 50A) and can be omitted as appropriate.
 10 移動体(対象移動体、協力移動体、優先移動体)
 40 搬送対象物
 50,50A 制御システム
 52 検知部
 53 状態制御部
 54 取得部
 55  対価発生部
 56 協調制御部
 A1 所定エリア
 A31 特定区間
 D1 第1方向
 D2 第2方向
 G1 状態出力部
 M1 通行制御モジュール
 Z1 区域
10 Mobiles (target mobiles, cooperative mobiles, priority mobiles)
40 Transport target 50, 50A Control system 52 Detection unit 53 State control unit 54 Acquisition unit 55 Value generation unit 56 Cooperative control unit A1 Predetermined area A31 Specific section D1 First direction D2 Second direction G1 State output unit M1 Traffic control module Z1 Area

Claims (19)

  1.  移動体が移動する所定エリアの一部に設定される区域と、
     前記区域に対応して設けられ、前記移動体が前記区域の外部から内部に移動する第1方向、及び、前記移動体が前記区域の内部から外部に移動する第2方向の少なくとも一方で、前記移動体の通行を許可する許可状態であるか前記移動体の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部と、を含む通行制御モジュールを用いて前記移動体の通行を制御する、
     制御システム。
    An area set as a part of a predetermined area in which the moving body moves,
    At least one of a first direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area and a second direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area, which are provided corresponding to the area. Using a traffic control module including a state output unit for outputting state information indicating whether the mobile body is in a permitted state to allow passage or a disallowed state to disallow the passage of the moving body. Controlling the passage of the moving body,
    Control system.
  2.  前記状態出力部によって、前記第1方向及び前記第2方向のうちの一方で、前記状態情報が出力される、
     請求項1に記載の制御システム。
    The state information is output by the state output unit in one of the first direction and the second direction.
    The control system according to claim 1.
  3.  前記通行制御モジュールは、前記区域につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の前記状態出力部を含む、
     請求項1又は2に記載の制御システム。
    The traffic control module includes a plurality of the status output units provided corresponding to a plurality of passages connected to the area,
    The control system according to claim 1 or 2.
  4.  前記状態情報が示す状態を前記許可状態と前記不許可状態とのいずれかに制御する状態制御部を、更に備える、
     請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    Further comprising a state control unit for controlling the state indicated by the state information to be one of the permission state and the non-permission state,
    The control system according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
  5.  前記状態制御部は、1又は複数の前記通行制御モジュールが含む複数の前記状態出力部の各々について、前記状態情報が示す状態が前記許可状態であるか前記不許可状態であるかを制御する、
     請求項4に記載の制御システム。
    The state control unit controls, for each of the plurality of state output units included in the one or the plurality of traffic control modules, whether the state indicated by the state information is the permitted state or the disallowed state.
    The control system according to claim 4.
  6.  前記通行制御モジュールは、前記区域につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の前記状態出力部を含み、
     前記状態制御部は、前記複数の状態出力部のうちの一つによって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を前記許可状態に制御する場合、前記複数の状態出力部のうち残りの前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を前記不許可状態に制御する、
     請求項4に記載の制御システム。
    The traffic control module includes a plurality of status output units provided corresponding to a plurality of passages connected to the area,
    When the state control unit controls the state indicated by the state information output by one of the plurality of state output units to be the permitted state, the remaining state output units of the plurality of state output units Controlling the state indicated by the state information output by the non-permitted state,
    The control system according to claim 4.
  7.  前記通行制御モジュールは、前記区域につながる複数の通路にそれぞれ対応して設けられた複数の前記状態出力部を含み、
     前記状態制御部は、前記複数の状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を全て前記不許可状態とした第1時点から所定の待機時間が経過した後の第2時点で、前記複数の状態出力部のうち切替対象の前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を前記許可状態に制御する、
     請求項4に記載の制御システム。
    The traffic control module includes a plurality of status output units provided corresponding to a plurality of passages connected to the area,
    The state control unit, at a second time point after a lapse of a predetermined waiting time from the first time point when all the states indicated by the state information output by the plurality of state output sections are set to the non-permission state, Controlling the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit of the switching target of the state output unit of the
    The control system according to claim 4.
  8.  前記状態制御部は、前記移動体が移動する目的に応じて、前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を制御する、
     請求項4~7のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    The state control unit controls a state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit according to a purpose of moving the moving body,
    The control system according to any one of claims 4 to 7.
  9.  前記区域の内部に前記移動体が存在するか否かを検知する検知部を更に備え、
     前記状態制御部は、前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を、前記検知部の検知結果に応じて制御する、
     請求項4~8のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    Further comprising a detection unit for detecting whether or not the moving body exists inside the area,
    The state control unit controls a state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit according to a detection result of the detection unit,
    The control system according to any one of claims 4 to 8.
  10.  前記移動体は、前記状態出力部が設けられる位置の手前の確認位置で前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を確認した結果に基づいて通行又は停止し、
     前記確認位置は、前記移動体の状態に応じて変化する、
     請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    The moving body passes or stops based on the result of checking the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit at a confirmation position before the position where the state output unit is provided,
    The confirmation position changes according to the state of the moving body,
    The control system according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  11.  前記所定エリアにおいて前記移動体が移動する経路に沿って複数の前記区域が設けられる、
     請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    In the predetermined area, a plurality of the areas are provided along a path along which the moving body moves,
    The control system according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  12.  前記所定エリアにおける複数台の移動体の動作に関する動作情報を取得する取得部と、
     前記取得部で取得した前記動作情報に基づいて、前記複数台の移動体のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する対価発生部と、を更に備え、
     前記所定エリア内を移動する前記複数台の移動体を制御する、
     請求項4に記載の制御システム。
    An acquisition unit that acquires operation information regarding operations of a plurality of mobile bodies in the predetermined area;
    Based on the operation information acquired by the acquisition unit, a consideration generation unit that generates a consideration consisting of at least one of an incentive or a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies is further provided.
    Controlling the plurality of moving bodies moving in the predetermined area,
    The control system according to claim 4.
  13.  前記状態制御部は、前記複数台の移動体のうちの1台である優先移動体の進路上の前記状態出力部が出力する前記状態情報が示す状態を優先的に前記許可状態とする優先制御を実行し、
     前記対価発生部は、前記優先制御が実行される場合に、前記優先移動体に対する前記対価としてペナルティを発生する、
     請求項12に記載の制御システム。
    The state control unit preferentially sets the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit on the path of the priority mobile body, which is one of the plurality of moving bodies, as the permitted state. Run
    The compensation generation unit generates a penalty as the compensation for the priority moving body when the priority control is executed,
    The control system according to claim 12.
  14.  前記対価発生部は、前記複数台の移動体の各々について、前記状態情報の遵守状況に応じて前記対価を発生する、
     請求項12又は13に記載の制御システム。
    The value generation unit generates the value according to the compliance status of the status information for each of the plurality of mobile units.
    The control system according to claim 12 or 13.
  15.  前記所定エリアは特定区間を含み、
     前記対価発生部は、前記複数台の移動体の各々について、前記特定区間への進入と引き換えに前記対価を発生する、
     請求項12~14のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    The predetermined area includes a specific section,
    The consideration generation unit generates the consideration in exchange for the entry into the specific section for each of the plurality of moving bodies.
    The control system according to any one of claims 12 to 14.
  16.  前記対価発生部は、前記複数台の移動体の各々について、エネルギの補給と引き換えに前記対価を発生する、
     請求項12~15のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    The value generation unit generates the value in exchange for energy supply for each of the plurality of moving bodies,
    The control system according to any one of claims 12 to 15.
  17.  前記複数台の移動体の各々は、搬送対象物を搬送する搬送機能を有し、
     前記対価発生部は、前記複数台の移動体の各々について、搬送する前記搬送対象物に応じて前記対価を発生する、
     請求項12~16のいずれか1項に記載の制御システム。
    Each of the plurality of moving bodies has a transport function of transporting an object to be transported,
    The value generation unit generates the value according to the object to be transferred for each of the plurality of moving bodies,
    The control system according to any one of claims 12 to 16.
  18.  移動体が移動する所定エリアの一部に区域を設定する処理と、
     前記区域に対応して、前記移動体が前記区域の外部から内部に移動する第1方向、及び、前記移動体が前記区域の内部から外部に移動する第2方向の少なくとも一方で、前記移動体の通行を許可する許可状態であるか前記移動体の通行を不許可とする不許可状態であるかを示す状態情報を出力するための状態出力部を設ける処理と、
     前記状態出力部によって出力される前記状態情報が示す状態を前記許可状態又は前記不許可状態に制御する処理と、を含む、
     制御方法。
    A process of setting an area in a part of a predetermined area in which a moving body moves
    Corresponding to the area, the moving body is at least one of a first direction in which the moving body moves from the outside to the inside of the area and a second direction in which the moving body moves from the inside to the outside of the area. A process of providing a state output unit for outputting state information indicating whether the vehicle is in a permission state permitting passage or a state not permitting passage of the moving body,
    A process of controlling the state indicated by the state information output by the state output unit to the permitted state or the non-permitted state,
    Control method.
  19.  前記所定エリアにおける前記複数台の移動体の動作に関する動作情報を取得する取得処理と、
     前記取得処理で取得した前記動作情報に基づいて、前記複数台の移動体のいずれかに対するインセンティブ又はペナルティの少なくとも一方からなる対価を発生する対価発生処理と、を更に有し、
     前記所定エリア内を移動する前記複数台の移動体を制御する、
     請求項18に記載の制御方法。
    An acquisition process for acquiring motion information regarding motions of the plurality of moving bodies in the predetermined area;
    Further, it has a consideration generation process for generating a consideration including at least one of an incentive or a penalty for any one of the plurality of moving bodies based on the operation information acquired in the acquisition process.
    Controlling the plurality of moving bodies moving in the predetermined area,
    The control method according to claim 18.
PCT/JP2020/004159 2019-03-04 2020-02-04 Control system and control method WO2020179321A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021503472A JP7407401B2 (en) 2019-03-04 2020-02-04 Control system and control method

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-039011 2019-03-04
JP2019039012 2019-03-04
JP2019039011 2019-03-04
JP2019-039012 2019-03-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020179321A1 true WO2020179321A1 (en) 2020-09-10

Family

ID=72337528

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/004159 WO2020179321A1 (en) 2019-03-04 2020-02-04 Control system and control method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7407401B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2020179321A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022107324A1 (en) * 2020-11-20 2022-05-27 日本電気株式会社 Assistance control device, assistance device, robot control system, assistance control method, and storage medium

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS61262903A (en) * 1985-05-17 1986-11-20 Komatsu Ltd Traffic control method for unmanned truck
JPH06149366A (en) * 1992-11-04 1994-05-27 Nakanishi Kinzoku Kogyo Kk Merge controller for unmanned car
JPH11242519A (en) * 1998-02-24 1999-09-07 Nissan Diesel Motor Co Ltd Control system for unmanned carrier
JPH11316895A (en) * 1998-05-01 1999-11-16 Toyota Motor Corp Running support device
JP2002046611A (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-12 Toshiba Corp Train running control system and computer readable memory medium
WO2011055823A1 (en) * 2009-11-09 2011-05-12 株式会社小松製作所 Apparatus and method for controlling travel of vehicles
JP2014211667A (en) * 2013-04-17 2014-11-13 日本電信電話株式会社 Robot cooperative conveyance planning device, method, and program
JP2015230692A (en) * 2014-06-06 2015-12-21 株式会社デンソー Controlling system
JP2018041343A (en) * 2016-09-08 2018-03-15 株式会社東芝 Control system for automatic traveling vehicle
JP2018198031A (en) * 2017-05-25 2018-12-13 日本電信電話株式会社 Mobile body control method, mobile body controller, and program

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6149366B2 (en) 2012-09-25 2017-06-21 リコーイメージング株式会社 Angular velocity angular position signal calculation device and blur correction device

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS61262903A (en) * 1985-05-17 1986-11-20 Komatsu Ltd Traffic control method for unmanned truck
JPH06149366A (en) * 1992-11-04 1994-05-27 Nakanishi Kinzoku Kogyo Kk Merge controller for unmanned car
JPH11242519A (en) * 1998-02-24 1999-09-07 Nissan Diesel Motor Co Ltd Control system for unmanned carrier
JPH11316895A (en) * 1998-05-01 1999-11-16 Toyota Motor Corp Running support device
JP2002046611A (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-12 Toshiba Corp Train running control system and computer readable memory medium
WO2011055823A1 (en) * 2009-11-09 2011-05-12 株式会社小松製作所 Apparatus and method for controlling travel of vehicles
JP2014211667A (en) * 2013-04-17 2014-11-13 日本電信電話株式会社 Robot cooperative conveyance planning device, method, and program
JP2015230692A (en) * 2014-06-06 2015-12-21 株式会社デンソー Controlling system
JP2018041343A (en) * 2016-09-08 2018-03-15 株式会社東芝 Control system for automatic traveling vehicle
JP2018198031A (en) * 2017-05-25 2018-12-13 日本電信電話株式会社 Mobile body control method, mobile body controller, and program

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022107324A1 (en) * 2020-11-20 2022-05-27 日本電気株式会社 Assistance control device, assistance device, robot control system, assistance control method, and storage medium
JP7491400B2 (en) 2020-11-20 2024-05-28 日本電気株式会社 Assistance control device, assistance device, robot control system, assistance control method and program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2020179321A1 (en) 2020-09-10
JP7407401B2 (en) 2024-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111328404B (en) Warehouse and supply chain coordinator
US11468395B2 (en) Modular delivery vehicle with access lockers
Li et al. Ground-vehicle and unmanned-aerial-vehicle routing problems from two-echelon scheme perspective: A review
KR101695557B1 (en) Automated guided vehicle system based on autonomous mobile technique and a method for controlling the same
US20200036232A1 (en) Operational control of wireless charging
US11308444B2 (en) Systems, methods, computing platforms, and storage media for directing and controlling a supply chain control territory in an autonomous inventory management system
US20200174494A1 (en) Article Delivery System
US20170355295A1 (en) Collective Transportation Systems
JP7149567B2 (en) MOBILE BODY CONTROL SYSTEM, MOBILE BODY SYSTEM, MOBILE BODY CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM
WO2018094019A1 (en) Autonomous multimodal logistics
CN109155013A (en) Autonomous rearrangement of pallets of items in a warehouse
CN110737262A (en) Moving body control system, moving body control method, moving body system, and recording medium
ES2966792T3 (en) Method to manage a fleet of autonomous parking robots by a supervisor
WO2020179321A1 (en) Control system and control method
JP7407399B2 (en) Work management system, upper system, lower system, work execution system, work equipment, work management method and program
JP7149568B2 (en) Mobile object control system, mobile object system, mobile object control method, and program
JP7285441B2 (en) Design support system, design support method and program
CN111723965A (en) Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
US11958689B2 (en) Vehicle system
WO2021010162A1 (en) Transportation management system, information processing system, transportation execution system, transportation device, transportation management method, and program
WO2023228669A1 (en) Agent management system and method
US20240152148A1 (en) System and method for optimized traffic flow through intersections with conditional convoying based on path network analysis
JP7447765B2 (en) Delivery system, delivery method and program
JP7338980B2 (en) Route search device and route search method
JP7378062B2 (en) Transport method, program, transport system, and component mounting system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20767105

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021503472

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20767105

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1